Professional Documents
Culture Documents
com
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
“Danger” indicates imminent hazards that may result
in death or serious injury.
Warning!
“Warning” indicates potential hazards that may result
in death or serious injury.
Caution!
“Caution” indicates potential hazards that may result
in slight injury.
This symbol also indicates hazards to property.
NOTE!
“Note” indicates important information.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
When carrying out any of the procedures described in this 1.3.2 Handling body and assembly components with sharp
repair manual, please observe all national accident safety edges
regulations.
Caution!
1.3.1 Lifting vehicles
Risk of injury from sharp-edged burrs on body and
Danger! accessories.
Risk of death from the vehicle toppling or slipping off • Always wear protective gloves when working in the vicinity
the vehicle lift. of sharp-edged body and assembly components.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.3 General safety instructions
.co
Warning! Warning!
Risk of explosion from high concentrations of aluminium Risk of explosion and fire from flying sparks during
dust. Risk of injury from breathing in fine particulate. grinding and welding work. Risk of damage to vehicle
components and other vehicles from flying sparks.
• When carrying out any work that creates fine particles of
dust, wear a fine dust mask, safety goggles and protective • Before carrying out any welding work, always remove both
gloves. battery terminal clamps and cover the battery terminals.
• Any grinding work must be carried out with explosion- • Remove the vehicle battery before carrying out any work
es
protected air extraction systems; do not blow off dust that may produce sparks in the vicinity of the battery itself.
deposits with compressed air.
• Disconnect the battery earth strap when carrying out any
• Clean the work area and the extraction system regularly. vehicle body repair work and when working on the airbag
system.
• To prevent a dust explosion, all extraction systems must
be earthed and suitable powder extinguishers must be
provided.
uid
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.3.5 Grinding and welding • When welding, wear suitable, non-flammable protective
clothing and gloves.
Warning!
• When carrying out grinding and welding work around the
Risk of explosion and fire when welding in the vicinity fuel tank or fuel-carrying parts, ensure that these parts do
of highly flammable substances. Irritation of the not heat up. If in doubt, remove such parts.
respiratory tract caused by toxic gases produced
• Cover the grinding and welding area with fire-resistant
during welding. Risk of injury from the extremely bright
covers.
arc and welding splashes when welding. Risk of injury
as a result of inadvertent activation of pyrotechnic
safety components.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger! Caution!
Risk of death from inhaling toxic vapours. Risk of burns Handling chemicals may cause allergic skin and
in the event of direct skin contact with hydrochloric respiratory tract reactions.
acid.
• Always ensure that there is sufficient air extraction
• Hydrochloric acid is produced when PVC sealant is heated and ventilation, and extract any vapours released by
to over 180 °C. adhesives.
• PVC sealant must only be removed with a rotary wire • Prevent chemicals from coming into direct contact with the
brush or by heating to max. 180 °C with a hot air gun and eyes and skin.
removing with a spatula.
• Wear protective gloves, protective goggles and, where
• Always wear a dust mask and protective goggles when necessary, an apron.
removing sealant with a rotary brush.
• Immediately change out of work clothes that are soiled with
• Always ensure there is sufficient air extraction and fresh air adhesive or solvent.
ventilation.
• At the end of the job, wash your hands and apply protective
cream.
• Always keep a bottle of eye wash ready for use.
• Only store adhesive products in the safety cupboard and
keep them away from naked flames and other sources of
ignition.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.3.8 Working with the air conditioning system 1.3.9 Handling the airbag system
Warning! Caution!
Risk of injury from the charged air conditioning system Risk of injury from activation of airbag units if earth
exploding during welding work. strap is not disconnected.
Do not weld, solder or work with a hot air gun in the vicinity of Disconnect the battery earth strap when carrying out any vehicle
the components of a charged air conditioning system. Similarly, body repair work and when working on the airbag system.
do not perform any welding work on a vehicle if the work will
cause parts of the air conditioning system to heat up. Wash hands thoroughly after touching airbag units that have
been fired.
When carrying out a paint repair, object temperatures in the
drying oven or preheating zone must not exceed 80 °C as 1.3.10 Working with tools
the overpressure caused by heating process may cause the
system to explode. Warning!
Risk of injury. All tools pose potential hazards to health
and life. Always observe the safety instructions and
warnings of the tool manufacturers.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.4.1 Assessing the extent of the damage 1.4.2 Instructions for body repairs
In the case of accidents involving substantial areas of the • Repair work on the Ferrari F458 Italia must only be carried
vehicle, examine the following components carefully to out by repair personnel who have been trained, tested and
prevent any damage to vehicle or suspension parts from going certified by the Ferrari Customer Service department.
undiscovered:
• Use only Ferrari-approved tools, spare parts and
• Check tyres and wheel rims for damage. consumables for repair and maintenance work.
• Check that the steering tie-rod, steering linkages and • If, in the course of the repair work, special cases arise that
steering system are working correctly. Also check for are not envisaged by the repair instructions, contact the
external damage and cracks. Ferrari Technical Customer service to establish how to
proceed further.
• Check all chassis components, such shock absorbers,
suspension and steering joints, links, axles, anti-roll bars • All the main repair operations possible for the Ferrari
and their fasteners, for external damage or cracks. F458 Italia are described in this repair manual. Combined
instructions may be used to differentiate between different
• Check brake system components such as brake discs,
repair procedures. Only the right or left hand components
brake pads, brake callipers, hydraulic lines and hydraulic
are illustrated in the description of a repair.
hoses and their respective fastenings for external damage,
stretching or leaks. • To ensure that the original crash safety of the vehicle is
maintained after a body repair, always used the same
• Check engine, gearbox, axle and exhaust system mounts
chassis joint points.
for damage.
• Cuts that may affect the crash safety of the body, and
• Before returning the vehicle to the customer following a
thereby the safety and roadworthiness of the vehicle, must
repair, test drive the vehicle carefully to ensure that it is
always be approved by Ferrari.
roadworthy.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.4 Important information
.co
manufacture of the vehicle.
• To ensure crash safety, these joints must be rewelded in
the original positions after a body repair.
• Any methods and procedures that deviate from the original
assembly are described in the Ferrari F458 Italia bodywork
repair manual.
es
1.4.4 Cuts
• Cuts must only be made as described by the instructions
given in the Ferrari F458 Italia bodywork repair manual!
• Load-bearing components must only be parted at the original
joint.
uid
1.4.5 Sanding
NOTE!
When grinding weld seams, ensure that the thickness
-g
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.5.1 Welding
SG plug weld
SG continuous weld
Spot weld
1.5.2 Riveting
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
4
3
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
6 5
8
5: Lid/Bumper 7: Headlight/Fender
Clearance = 3.5 mm ±0.5 mm Clearance = 3.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Offset = -1.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = +0.7 mm ±0.7 mm
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.6 Clearances
11
.co
10
12
es
uid
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
16
14
13 15
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
17
19
18 20
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
21 22 23
24
22: Rear window/Air intake surround 24: Rear window/Engine compartment lid
Clearance = 3.0 mm ±1.0 mm Clearance = 4.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Offset = -0.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = -2.0 mm +2.0 mm -1.0 mm
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
27
25
26
28
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.6 Clearances
32
.co
29
es
uid
30 31
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.6 Clearances
33
34
35
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.7 Car Bench vehicle bench
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.7 Car Bench vehicle bench
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A specific set of tools must be used for work on aluminium • Saw blades (coarse tooth)
bodies. When carrying out surface finishing work (grinding), • Hot air fan
never use grinding discs that have previously been used on
steel panels. When carrying out surface finishing work (planing, • Angle grinder
beating), never use tools that have previously been used on • Cutting disc
steel panels.
• Grinding discs
The following tools are generally required for carrying out work • Gun for applying underbody protection
on vehicle bodies: • Gun for applying cavity wax
• Electric body saw/long stroke • Temperature indicator strips or temperature indicator crayons
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Special tools
A new template and punch kit (p/n 95978256) is used for repairs
in the wheelhouse area. These tongs enable the removal and
replacement of rivet joints at the flange connecting the two
halves of the wheel housing.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.11 Aluminium
.co
silicon are the main alloying components used in high-quality
aluminium alloys. These alloys form the basis of the extruded
sections, die-cast node joints and panels in aluminium.
Electromotive series:
• Zinc (Zn)
uid
• Chromium (Cr)
• Iron (Fe)
• Tin (Sn)
• Lead (Pb)
• Aluminium (Al)
Since aluminium is usually lower in the electromotive series
-g
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.11 Aluminium
New fastener elements must always be used when carrying Mechanical components and bodywork elements are fastened
out repairs. Screws may not be used as the friction generated to parts of the body with rivets (with blind rivets and self-piercing
during tightening reduces the thickness of the coating. Grinding rivets), screws applied to threaded rivets and screws applied
work on steel components (blind rivets, self-piercing rivets, to threads cut directly into the aluminium. To prevent damage
bolts) is not permitted. to the threads, please observe the maximum torque values.
The dust produced by grinding contains minute steel particles 1.11.4 Lightweight construction
which would damage the aluminium. To reduce vehicle weight, the entire(*) vehicle body has been
manufactured from aluminium components. The specific
The following work is required after an accident repair:
weight of aluminium is just 2.70 kg/dm3, whereas that of steel
is 7.85 kg/dm3. As a result, a considerably higher strength
• Painting, from primer right through to glaze
compared with a unitary construction steel body can be
• Post-treatment (sealing) of edges; material used: achieved.
1-component polyurethane-based permanently-elastic
body sealing compound and 1-component polymer-based
permanently-elastic body sealing compound
• Corrosion protection treatment for the underbody
• Post-treatment of cavities with cavity protection agents.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.11 Aluminium
• extruded sections
• die-cast joints (cast parts)
• gussets (reinforcements)
• (*) The reinforcements in the A pillars are made from ultra-
high strength steel sheet (see chapter 1.12 “Ultra-high
strength steel reinforcements”)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.11 Aluminium
Caution!
For safety reasons, die-cast node joints (castings) may
not be repaired and must be replaced!
Welding of cracks is not permitted.
The die-cast joints (castings) constitute the key areas of the
Space Frame construction. They constitute the entire welded
joint area for all extruded sections.
The die-cast joints are also used as mounts for the axle
components and the engine and transmission assembly.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.13 Consumable materials
.co
All materials must be approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
Aluminium filler with curing Wieländer + Schill 542050 Polyester based aluminium filler
agent with aluminium powder
Crack testing material:
Developer 311052
-g
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Failure to clean weld areas adequately may severely
compromise the strength of the weld itself by promoting
the development of porosity.
Caution!
Before welding, fit all attached parts (lights, radiator
grille, engine compartment lid etc.)!
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! Caution!
Only use aluminium tools for all panel beating work. Outer skin body components may be heated for
The risk of stretching the material is greater with aluminium straightening and panel beating work provided the
than with steel. As a result, aluminium panels should preferably temperature is monitored constantly. Never exceed
be pressed rather than beaten. Panel beating procedures 180 °C. For precise temperature monitoring, use
in which the aluminium panel is placed directly between the temperature indicator pencils or strips or temperature
counterhold tool and the body hammer, should be kept to a reading instruments.
minimum. Contrary to standard practice with steel panels,
panel beating work on aluminium panels should begin in the Panel beating may be facilitated by applying targeted heat.
centre of the dent. When panel beating, do not use sharp- When heating aluminium, the material must not be allowed to
edged or hard tools such as steel hammers. tarnish. Consequently, the temperature has to be determined
by means of temperature indicator strips. The different
When performing finishing operations, operate the counterhold
areas on the temperature indicator strip change colour once
tool loosely. Excessive force applied during finishing actions
predetermined temperatures are exceeded.
may cause the material to stretch. To avoid this, use a
counterhold tool made from hardwood. Procedure:
1.15.2 Shrinking 1. Thoroughly clean and confine the area to be heated
Elongation of the material may be rectified by shrinking, 2. Temperature indicator strips must be applied at a distance
which involves the application of heat. Shrinking is done with of approximately 25 mm from the area to be heated
a neutral flame. The shrinking operation involves heating the
area to be shrunk then locally cooling it immediately. As a 3. Apply the temperature indicator strips spaced at regular
result of the rapid temperature change, the aluminium panel intervals
shrinks at the area concerned and resumes its original shape. 4. Heat the material while simultaneously monitoring the
The surrounding colder material confines the heated area and temperature.
stretches less.
During subsequent cooling, the heated, buckled aluminium
panel shrinks. As a general rule, the repair area must be heated
and cooled quickly when carrying out shrinking procedures.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.7 Straightening pressing it out with the riveting tongs. When doing so, observe
the following precautions:
Aluminium behaves differently from steel when it is being
.co
straightened. The risk of stretching the material is considerably
ಶ If required, make cuts first
greater with aluminium. Aluminium panels should preferably be
pressed rather than beaten. Because of the particularly high ಶ Adjust the riveting tool to the thickness of the material
strength of the aluminium extruded sections and aluminium
castings, straightening cannot be carried out on any part ಶ Insert the tip of the punch into the stamped area of the
of the Space Frame structure. Any damaged parts must be panel
replaced. ಶ Pull out the self-piercing rivet with the riveting tool, taking
care not to tilt the riveting tool as you do so
The scope of the repair is ascertained by superimposing
es
the measurement points of adjacent components on the NOTE!
straightening bench. Straightening work to correct the Self-piercing rivets must not be drilled or ground out.
dimensions of normal structural panels (e.g. bulkhead, side
panel/rear closure panel, spare wheel well/rear cross-member, Ensure that the riveting tool is adjusted to the thickness
etc.) is possible to a limited degree. of the material before carrying out any job. If the flange
is not accessible with the riveting tool, cut the damaged
1.15.8 Riveting
part out roughly.
uid
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Pressing out the self-piercing rivet leaves a hole in the inner Blind rivet joints are critical to the strength and torsional stiffness
panel. The self-piercing rivet remains on the outer panel. of the bodywork.
A gap is created between the head of the self-piercing rivet Two types of blind rivet have been approved for repairs on the
and the outer panel. If so, detach the damaged part with a flat Ferrari F458 Italia:
chisel and remove.
• High-strength structural blind rivets are used for work on
Carefully remove any rivet residues with a flat chisel. structural components.
Gently align the flange on the undamaged panel with the • Textron blind rivets are used to replace factory-installed self-
riveting tong, using two flat inserts. piercing rivet joints in places that are difficult to access.
Threaded rivets
Adapt and fasten the part to be repaired, and insert solid or
blind rivets in accordance with the repair manual. NOTE!
Use only the threaded rivets that have been approved
Remove all rivets that fall into the vehicle during the repair.
Magnets may be used to remove them. by the manufacturer (with special coating). Threaded
rivets must never be ground or drilled out. The metal
Blind rivet joints swarf produced will cause contact corrosion.
NOTE! Threaded rivets are generally pre-installed in with replacement
Factory-installed structural blind rivets must only be parts and assemblies. The repair may necessitate the removal
of some of these inserts. Damaged threaded rivets may also
replaced with structural rivets, even in the case of
be replaced individually. The threaded rivets must also be
repair. Use only blind rivets that have been approved
completely removed from cavities.
by Ferrari. These blind rivets are coated and prevent
contact corrosion. The operating pressure for the
pneumatic riveting tongs must be 8 bar. Before starting
the riveting procedure, ensure that the parts to be
joined and the rivet head are on top of one another
and that there is no gap between them.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1.15.9 Welding aluminium 1.15.10 Checking weld seams and die-cast node joints
Metal inert gas (MIG) welding is the most commonly used
Caution!
method for carrying out repair welds on aluminium. It is used
to create joints between castings and extruded sections and Before using any penetrating agents, cleaners and
between panel sections. In this method, the arc burns between developers, it is essential that all the safety precautions
the component to be welded and the melting wire electrode. indicated by the respective manufacturers are taken.
The latter serves as the filler material and transfers the energy All three diagnostic agents are highly flammable.
required to melt the metal. Argon is used as the shielding gas.
When assessing damage to die-cast joints and the quality of
1 mm diameter AlSi 12 wire is used as the filler wire. Before repairs to welded joints, crack-testing is necessary.
welding, remove any underbody protective treatment, sealants
and paint from the parts and then remove the oxide layer with The dye penetration method is suitable for carrying out crack
a stainless steel brush. tests on surfaces. In this case all faults originating in the surface
are highlighted by a contrasting colour. Red or yellowish-green
To prevent the formation of cracks, always continue weld fluorescent dyes are usually used as the penetrating agent.
seams around the corners of extruded sections.
Caution!
All welds must be carried out with the parts fixed in
the jig to prevent the parts themselves from moving
during welding, which would compromise the results
of the repair.
Only remove the jigs after checking that the weld areas
have cooled.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Procedure:
1. Expose the damaged area and clean the surface.
2. Apply the penetrating agent with an aerosol spray can. The
penetrating agent will permeate into the apertures in the
surface by capillary action. Allow the penetration agent to
take effect - observe the correct length of time.
3. Use a detergent to completely remove any excess
penetrating agent that has not permeated into the damaged
surface.
4. Spray on developer and allow it to act. The damaged area
becomes visible.
Check the areas for cracks. If a component reveals any cracks,
it must be replaced.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
For instance, cracks will form around weld beads in the event
of using excessively high weld currents or inappropriate
electrode wires (Fig. A).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.15 Repair methods
To repair a crack, the weld bead must be ground along the full
length of the crack to twice the depth of the crack itself before C
.co
repeating the weld (Fig. C). After welding, crack testing must
be repeated.
Hole
Hole
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Pores
E
Pores within the weld bead constitute the most frequently
encountered defect. Pore formation reduces with increasing
solidification intervals.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Inclusions
G
The most frequent types of inclusions are oxides. These form
when small fragments of oxide film fall into the weld pool, as
the oxide layer was not removed prior to welding.
End craters
A crater forms at the end of each weld bead, which must be
filled (Fig. G).
To do this, do not turn the welding torch off at the end if the H
weld bead. The melting welding wire fills the crater (Fig. H).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Melting
I
The weld may melt in the event of excessive weld currents or
inadequate edge preparation (Fig. I).
Soot deposits
In event of an excessively small torch angle or incorrect welding
torch movements (such as when welding forward), significant J
soot deposits may be formed in certain conditions (Fig. J).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Cold spots
Cold spots may occur at the start and end of the bead, which
compromise the strength of the joint due to poor penetration.
As a result, approximately 5 mm should be added to the start
and finish of the bead when determining the length of the bead
itself.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.12 Structural adhesive bonding Sealing seams that have not been done correctly or that are
missing may also cause wind noise.
Bonded joints are also used in certain areas to supplement
.co
the self-piercing or blind rivet joints and resistance spot welds.
Even the tiniest gap in the seal can result in substantial water
This increases the strength of the joint.
infiltration.
1.15.13 Sealing
NOTE!
Before carrying out any cutting work, the paint and
sealant must be removed from the area of the cut.
Remove sealant with a rotary wire brush.
es
After carrying out repair work, all seals must be reapplied
as per the original assembly.
To prevent leaks and wind noise, the body is sealed in the
factory.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 4. Fit the fender, aligning with the holes on the fender
mounting and on the vehicle flank.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.1 Replacing the fender
.co
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
7
es
ಶ Refit connected parts (bumper, headlight, gravel
uid
guard).
ಶ Check the clearance dimensions, rework if
necessary.
Remove the fender for subsequent painting.
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Repair features
Warning!
Work with the utmost caution when welding to
avoid igniting any components in the vicinity.
1
1
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause 3
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.2 Replacing the fender mounting assembly
.co 6
es
7. Remove the lower mounting base and sand the
uid
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the upper
diagonal brace.
-g
7
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
10
11
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13
NOTE! 14
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
15
15
15
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.2 Replacing the fender mounting assembly
.co
with bicomponent mastic.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
es
16
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (headlight, gravel guard, radiator, radiator mounting).
procedures
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1).
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Material necessary -
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
spars.
1
1
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
cross-member.
2
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
shock tower.
Caution!
Check that there are no cracks in the shock 4
tower.
In the event of damage, the part must be
replaced (see chapter 2.6).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
5
5
6. Sand the weld points between the front link tube, the
front lateral trellis and the front cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.3 Replacing the front lateral trellis
Fitting the new part 7. Mount the front trellis in the jig.
.co
NOTE!
The procedure described above must be
performed with the assistance of another
worker.
NOTE!
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15 8
Repair methods) thoroughly.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
9
9
10. Weld the front trellis to the front spar at the original
weld points.
Caution!
When welding the front lateral trellis, there is a
risk of the spar (A) buckling as a result of the
heat.
10
To prevent this, the trellis must only be welded 10
with the front cross-member mounted in the jig
(see chapter 2.4).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
11. Fit and then weld the link tube (B) to the front cross-
member and to the front lateral trellis at the original
weld points.
11
11
12. Weld the front trellis to the shock tower at the original
weld points.
12
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.4 Replacing the front cross-member
.co
on the internal side of the car in correspondence
with the bumper mounting brackets.
es
2. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 6 screws in
uid
2 2 2
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
spars. 3
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution, taking care not to
damage the front spars. 5
Fitting the new part 6. Mount the front cross-member in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is perfectly
horizontal.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is flush with the 7
front spars on both sides.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.4 Replacing the front cross-member
.co
the original weld points.
11
11
es
12. Fasten the bumper mounting brackets to the front
uid
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13 13 13
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A B
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
spars.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.5 Replacing the front spar
.co
Remove the reinforcement mounting.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
spars.
Caution!
es
Check that there are no cracks in the shock 5
tower.
If any cracks are found, the part must be
replaced (see chapter 2.6).
6. Grind all the welds between the front spar and the
uid
shock tower.
Caution!
When grinding the welds, take care not to
damage the casting joints. 6
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 7. Rest the front spar in the relative recess on the
shock tower.
NOTE!
Check that the front spar is perfectly horizontal.
689.5 mm
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Perform all the welds described as follows with
the part still in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13
14
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.5 Replacing the front spar
.co
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area and then apply a primer coat.
15
es
16. Fasten the rear luggage tub bracket with 2 M8
uid
screws.
16
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
17
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses. 1 1
NOTE! 2 2
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
3
3
4 4
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.6 Replacing the wheel bay cover plate
Fitting the new part 5. Fit the wheel bay cover plate in correspondence with
the rivet holes on the upper diagonal brace and on
.co
the torque box.
5
es
Fitting the new part
uid
NOTE!
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15
Repair methods) thoroughly.
6
6. Fasten the wheel bay cover plate in position with 11
structural rivets (Ø 4.8).
-g
6 6
6
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
7 7
Danger!
8
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
8 8
ಶ Refit connected parts.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, dashboard, front lid and hinges, tub)
procedures
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)
ಶ Remove the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3)
ಶ Remove the front cross-member (see chapter 2.4)
ಶ Remove the front spar (see chapter 2.5)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
3
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
4
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.7 Replacing the shock tower
.co
and the semi-floorpan.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
5
es
Removing the 6. Remove the beads of sealant mastic around the
uid
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Check carefully to ensure that there is no
evident buckling in the floorpan and in the
reinforcements connected to the centre tunnel. 11
12
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
14
upper diagonal brace.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.7 Replacing the shock tower
.co
diagonal brace to the shock tower.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use. 15
es
16. Grind the joint welds between the upper diagonal
uid
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
upper diagonal brace.
16 16
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the 17
upper diagonal brace connected to the tunnel.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if 18
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
18
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! 19
Do not remove any other material from the
torque box.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
20
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
21
Fitting the new part 22. Mount the shock tower in the jig and tack.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
23
24
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.7 Replacing the shock tower
.co
25
25
es
26. Fasten the lower front suspension cross-member to
uid
26
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Perform all the welds described as follows with
the part still in the jig.
27. Weld the shock tower to the torque box and to the
front cross-member at the original weld points in the
underbody.
28 28
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
29
30
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
31
32
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
33
34. Fit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.7 Replacing the shock tower
.co
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
es
35
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
36
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the 37. Use the AVDEL FPM-35 gun to apply the 2 self-
underwindscreen piercing fastener rivets (Ø 4.8) connecting the
covering underwindscreen covering to the vehicle flank.
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
37
38
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 40
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
40
40
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.8 Replacing the front end module
.co
es
2. Cut the 3 lower diagonal braces near the welds on
uid
2
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Carefully check that the centre tunnel is free of
cracks.
4
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the centre tunnel.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation!
Risk of injury from skin or eye contact with
adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves
and safety glasses.
Caution!
When cutting the front firewall, take the utmost
care not to damage the casting joints on the
centre tunnel.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the centre tunnel.
Caution!
Carefully check that there is no evident buckling
on the reinforcements connected to the centre
tunnel.
7
Fitting the new part 8. Mount the front end module in the jig
(see the jigs used for the shock tower - chapter
2.7).
Warning!
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another worker, as there is a risk
of crushing in the event of the front module
falling.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Perform all the welds described as follows with
the part still in the jig.
10. Tack and then weld the three lower diagonal braces
to the centre tunnel and to the lower front suspension 10
cross-member at the original weld points.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.8 Replacing the front end module
11. Tack and then weld the two upper diagonal braces
to the centre tunnel and to the two shock towers at
.co
the original weld points.
11
es
12. Weld and rivet the two shock towers at the original
uid
12
12
12 12
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13
14
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
15
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
36
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
19. Fit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6).
18
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
20
safety glasses.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
21
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
2.8 Replacing the front end module
.co
23. Refit the roof skin (see chapter 3.3)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove the connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges).
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1).
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2).
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
1 1
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation!
Risk of injury from skin or eye contact with
adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves
and safety glasses.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the casting joints on
the shock towers.
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the front sill pillar.
3
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the rear sill pillar.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
5
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.1 Replacing the roof skin
.co
NOTE!
High strength self-piercing rivets are used for
the high strength steel reinforcements of the A-
pillars.
7 7
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
es
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
NOTE!
-g
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
11
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation!
Risk of injury from skin or eye contact with
adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves
and safety glasses.
12. Sand the weld points in the lower part of the rain
gutter.
12
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13. Remove the spots of mastic from the rear part of the
upper skin.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation!
Risk of injury from skin or eye contact with
adhesive! 13
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves
and safety glasses.
14
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! 16
16
16
16
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.1 Replacing the roof skin
.co
ಶ Check clearances and rectify if necessary.
Remove the connected parts.
es
Fitting the new part
uid
NOTE!
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15
Repair methods) thoroughly.
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
18
Caution!
The high-strength steel vehicle flank
reinforcements in area (A) must only be
fastened with high-strength self-piercing rivets.
NOTE!
A
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements in area
(A) must only be fastened with high strength A
A
structural rivets.
20 20
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
21. Fasten the upper part of the roof skin to the upper
reinforcement cross-member using 11 self-piercing
rivets (Ø 3.9x7).
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
21
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
23
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
25
25
26. Weld the roof skin to the A-pillars at the original weld
points.
26
26
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.1 Replacing the roof skin
27. Weld the roof skin to the C-pillars at the original weld
points.
.co
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area and then apply a primer coat.
27
es
28. Reapply the beads of mastic removed previously
uid
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 28 28
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
-g
29
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 29
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and 29
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
Preliminary ಶ Remove the connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges).
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1).
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1).
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
1
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
firewall.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
firewall.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
.co
es
5
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
6
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the two 7
shock towers.
Fitting the new part 8. Fit the windscreen valence cross-member in the
relative seats on the shock towers.
8
ಶ Prepare the weld area (see chapter 1.14).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
10
11
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
12
13
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
14
15
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
.co
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area and then apply a primer coat.
16
es
17. Reapply the beads of mastic sealant removed
uid
previously.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
17
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove the connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges)
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1)
ಶ Remove the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
1
noise when the vehicle is in use.
1
1
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause 3
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Caution!
Check that the front sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling.
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see
chapter 3.5).
Caution!
Take care not to damage the sill tubular 4
element.
4
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
.co
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and 5
safety glasses. 5
es
6. Sand the weld points on the upper flank connector
uid
cross-members.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the upper flank
connector cross-members.
6
6
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! 7
7
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if 7
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
8
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10. Sand the welds joining the vehicle flank with the rear
screen bulkhead substructure.
NOTE!
Take care not to remove any other material from
the rear screen bulkhead substructure. 10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
11. Sand the four weld spots joining the vehicle flank
and the rear screen bulkhead.
11
11
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 12
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13. Sand the weld beads joining the vehicle flank with
the upper casting of the front sill pillar.
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die-
cast joints. 13
Check that the front sill pillar die-cast joints are
free from cracks.
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see
chapter 3.5).
NOTE!
When removing the screws, take the utmost
care not to let them fall into the front door pillar.
14
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
.co
fastened to the rear trellis.
15 15
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
es
16. Remove the rear diagonal brace, sanding the weld
uid
Caution!
Check that the rear sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling. 16
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see
16
chapter 3.5).
-g
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
sill pillar and from the casting for the rear shock
tower.
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
17
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
18
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
19. Sand any joint weld beads between the vehicle flank
and the upper casting of the rear sill pillar (rear lid
area).
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die-
cast joints.
19
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
20
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
21
NOTE!
When removing the screws, take the utmost
care not to let them fall into the front door pillar.
22
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
23
24. Sand the joint weld beads between the vehicle flank
and the upper casting of the rear sill pillar (interior of
passenger compartment).
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die-
cast joints.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
.co
If necessary, adjust the gap from the sill wall to
the exterior of the bracket to the correct value of
115 mm.
es
115 mm
damaged.
If necessary, adjust the gap from the vertical wall
of the pillar reinforcement to the correct value of
115 mm.
-g
115 mm
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 27. Fit the vehicle flank in its seat.
Warning!
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another worker, as the size of
the vehicle flank makes is difficult to position
correctly.
ಶ Prepare the weld area (see chapter 1.14).
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
28
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
29
30. Fit the external tower and the relative jigs to ensure
that the vehicle flank is positioned correctly.
NOTE!
Check that the vehicle flank is correctly fitted
onto the upper reinforcement cross-members.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
31
31
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
32
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
33
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
34
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
.co
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
es
35
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements must
only be fastened with high strength structural
rivets.
36
36
36
-g
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
36
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements must
only be fastened with high strength structural
rivets.
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes. 37
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
38
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Check that the vehicle flank is correctly fitted
onto the upper reinforcement cross-members.
39 39
39
39. Using the AVDEL gun with the 100 mm C-frame, fasten
the vehicle flank to the upper reinforcement cross-
members with 8x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5).
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
Caution!
Perform all the welds described as follows with
the part still in the jig.
40. Weld the vehicle flank to the sill tubular element and
to the A-pillar flange at the original weld points.
40
40
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
41
NOTE!
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
43. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper casting of the rear
sill pillar at the original weld points (rear lid area).
43
44
44
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
.co
compartment interior).
45
es
46. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper reinforcement
uid
46 46
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
47
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
48
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
49
49
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk 50
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and 51
safety glasses. 51
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges)
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1)
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.4 Replacing the lateral crash reinforcement
.co
1
screws joining the lateral crash reinforcement, the
rear sill pillar and the extruded elements (A).
NOTE!
A
When removing the screws, take the utmost
care not to let them fall into the rear door pillar. 1
es
1
Fitting the new part 2. Fit the rear tower and mount the lateral crash
uid
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 3. Fasten the lateral crash reinforcement to the rear
sill pillar and to the extruded elements (A) with 5 M8
3
screws.
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously. A
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
3
NOTE!
Carry out final adjustment of the lateral crash
reinforcement only after refitting the vehicle
flank.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, windows, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges,
procedures rear lid and relative hinges, doors)
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)
ಶ Remove the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1)
ಶ Remove the underwindscreen covering (see chapter 2.6 Replacing the shock tower)
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the lateral crash reinforcement (see chapter 3.4)
ಶ Remove the rear firewall and mountings (see chapter 3.6)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Replacement parts • Sill (A)
E K
• A-pillar flange (B)
• Wheel bay cover plate (C)
C
• Torque box (only if necessary) (D)
F G
• Upper diagonal brace (only if necessary) (E)
• Front covering (F)
• Rear covering (G)
• Internal pillar bracing (H) J
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.5 Replacing the sill
2. Cut the sill near the weld beads joining to the torque
box, the upper diagonal brace, the fuel tank cross-
.co
member and the semi-floorpan.
2
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution to prevent damaging
the internal diagonal braces connected to the
centre tunnel, the upper diagonal brace and the
2 2
torque box.
2
es
2
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use. 3 3
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
4. Sand the joint weld beads between the sill, the semi-
floorpan and the diagonal braces connecting to the
centre tunnel.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
diagonal braces connecting to the centre tunnel. 4 4
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 5
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
6
7. Sand the joint weld beads between the front sill pillar
and the torque box.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
torque box.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
8. Sand the joint weld beads between the sill and the
reinforcement (A).
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
torque box/centre tunnel reinforcement and
from the torque box.
A
8
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! A
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
reinforcement (A) and from the torque box.
A
10
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the upper
diagonal brace.
11
11
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.5 Replacing the sill
.co
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
es
12
13. Sand the joint spot welds between the sill and the
uid
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the sill
connector cross-member.
13
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
14. Gradually sand the joint weld beads between the sill
connector cross-member and the sill itself.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the sill
connector cross-member.
NOTE! 14
The facilitate the operation described above,
remove the external bracing.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! C
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
16 16
16 16
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution to prevent
damaging the lower extruded element (C).
17
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the sill
connector cross-member. C 17
17 17
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
18
Fitting the new part 19. Fit the external tower, the mount the sill in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Check that the two castings of the A-pillar are
fitted correctly into the torque box and the upper
diagonal brace.
20
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.5 Replacing the sill
.co
exterior).
Caution! 21
NOTE!
Check that the upper casting of the B-pillar is
es
21
fitted correctly into the fuel tank cross-member.
21 21
NOTE!
Check again that the semi-floorpan is fitted
correctly.
22 22
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
23. Weld the front sill pillar to the torque box at the
original weld points (interior/exterior of passenger
compartment).
23
23
24. Fasten the front sill pillar and the torque box (interior/
exterior of passenger compartment) with 6 structural
rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
24
24
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
25. Weld the sill to the torque box and to the reinforcement
(A) at the original weld points in the underbody.
25
26. Weld the rear sill pillar to the fuel tank cross-member
at the original weld points.
26
26
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
27
27
28
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
29 29
NOTE!
When reinstalling the electrical system, apply a
protective pad to prevent contact between the 30 30
cables and any protruding rivets.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.5 Replacing the sill
.co
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area.
Caution!
31
Remove the jigs retaining the sill only after the
welds have cooled.
31
es
32. Mount the lower extruded element (C) in the jig.
uid
C
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
33. Weld the lower extruded element (C) to the sill and
to the sill connector cross-member at the original
weld points.
33
C 33
33 33
34. Fasten the lower extruded element (C) to the sill and
to the sill connector cross-member with 8 structural
rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
34 34
34 34
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
35
36
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
37
37
37
38. Fit the front covering, with the two holes (D) on the
covering itself aligned with the two threaded holes in
the front sill pillar.
D
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
39
NOTE!
Check that the rear covering is flush with the
front covering fitted previously.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.5 Replacing the sill
.co 41
es
41
diagram aside.
32 mm
129.5 mm
-g
26 mm
11 mm
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
43. Weld the front flank mounting bracket to the sill and
to the external bracing.
43
44. Fit the A-pillar flange against the front sill pillar,
with the notch in the flange over the lower sill pillar
weld.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
45. Weld the A-pillar flange to the sill and to the extruded
hinge mounts (E) on the sill.
45 E
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
46
46
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
47. Refit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.7)
48. Refit the subframe connector extruded element (see chapter 3.8)
49. Refit the rear shock tower casting (see chapter 3.9)
50. Refit the rear firewall and mountings (see chapter 3.6)
56. Refit the underwindscreen covering (see chapter 2.6 Replacing the shock tower)
57. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, windows, lateral seals, rear lid and relative hinges, doors)
procedures
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
A
B
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.6 Replacing the rear firewall and mountings
.co
portion of the rear firewall (passenger compartment
interior). 1
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
es
safety glasses.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk 2
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
-g
2
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3 3
NOTE! 4
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
5 5
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
7
7
Caution!
Check that the rear sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling.
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see
chapter 3.5).
8
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 9. Fit the RH and LH firewall mountings up against the
sill tubular elements and tack in position.
NOTE!
Fit the rear firewall from the passenger
compartment interior side to facilitate
installation of the new part.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.6 Replacing the rear firewall and mountings
.co
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15
Repair methods) thoroughly.
12 12
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
13
13
14
14
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
15 15
16
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution! 17
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
17
18
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk 19
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
19
20. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop
manual)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.7 Replacing the fuel tank cross-member
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, rear screen, lateral seals, rear lid and relative hinges)
procedures
.co
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Remove the rear firewall (see chapter 3.6)
ಶ Remove the lateral firewall mountings (see chapter 3.6)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
es
Replacement parts • Fuel tank cross-member (A)
uid
A
• Rear screen bulkhead substructure (B)
• Rear firewall (C) B
• Lateral firewall mountings (D)
D
C D
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
2 2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die- 3
cast joints.
Caution!
4
Take the utmost care not to damage the die-
cast joints.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 5. Mount the fuel tank cross-member in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the fuel tank cross-member is
perfectly horizontal.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the fuel tank cross- 7
member only after the welds have cooled.
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area and then apply a primer coat. 7
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.7 Replacing the fuel tank cross-member
.co
Caution!
9 9
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
es
10. Refit the lateral firewall mountings (see
uid
chapter 3.6).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, rear lid and relative hinges, lights, bumper and rear grilles)
procedures
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Remove the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1)
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the lateral crash reinforcement (see chapter 3.4)
ಶ Remove the front/rear lateral trellises (see chapter 3.10)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Material necessary - A
C
B
C
B A
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
1
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the rear sill pillar.
NOTE!
E
Do not remove any other material from the rear 2
sill pillar (D) and the upper external diagonal
brace (E).
D
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 3. Mount the subframe connector extruded element in
the jig.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
5
5
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.8 Replacing the subframe connector extruded section
.co
points.
7
es
7
8
-g
8
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the subframe connector
extruded element only after the welds have
cooled. 9
10. Fit the external tower then mount the flank mounting
bracket (A) in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the distance between the outer edge
of the bracket (A) and the sill wall is 115 mm.
A
115 mm
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
11
11
17. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop
manual)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, rear lid and relative hinges, lights, bumper and rear grilles)
procedures
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Remove the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1)
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the front/rear lateral trellises (see chapter 3.10)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.9 Replacing casting for rear shock tower
.co
beads with the die-cast sill joint.
Caution!
1
When making separating cuts, take the utmost
care not to damage the casting joints.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
noise when the vehicle is in use.
-g
2
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
upper external diagonal brace.
4 4
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die- 5 5
cast sill joint.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 7. Mount the casting for the rear shock tower in the
jig.
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.9 Replacing casting for rear shock tower
.co 11 11
es
12. Weld the upper external diagonal brace to the casting
uid
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the casting for the rear
shock tower only after the welds have cooled.
-g
12
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
17. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop
manual)
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.5)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
C B
Material necessary • 1 x M8 screw
• 2 x M6 screws
A D
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
The following procedures may be performed both
with the rear end module installed or removed.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
connecting brackets.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
When working with the rear subframe module
installed, remove the M8 screw (A) and the 2
M6 screws (B) fastening the lateral trellis to the
rear subframe.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
connecting brackets.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.10 Replacing the rear lateral trellis
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the lateral trellis in the jig.
.co
ಶ Prepare the weld area (see chapter 1.14)
es
5. Fit the trellis connector in the relative seats on the
uid
5
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
90 mm
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
E
F
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
NOTE! G
When working with the rear subframe module
installed on the vehicle, use the module itself as
a template for correctly fitting the bracket (G).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
12. Fasten the bracket (G) to the front trellis with two
30 mm lengths of weld and two 10 mm lengths of G
weld.
12
H I
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
3.10 Replacing the rear lateral trellis
.co
H
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair
area and then apply a primer coat.
14
es
I
uid
NOTE!
When working with the rear subframe module
installed, fasten the lateral trellis to the rear
subframe with 1 M8 screw (A) and 2 M6
screws (B).
Caution!
-g
B
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE! 1
Do not remove any other material from the
vehicle flanks.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.1 Replacing the rear spoiler
Fitting the new part 5. Fit the spoiler in correspondence with the holes in
the rear bumper mounting cross-member and the
.co
vehicle flanks.
NOTE!
6
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15
Repair methods) thoroughly.
Caution!
-g
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Material necessary -
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
1 1
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
spars.
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.2 Replacing the rear bumper mounting cross-member
.co
Caution!
Check that the rear spars are undamaged.
In the event of damage, the spars must be
replaced (see chapter 4.3).
3
es
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear cross-member in the jig.
uid
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is flush with the
rear spars.
4
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Remove the jig only once the weld areas are
cool.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Material necessary -
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
2. Sand the joint weld beads between the spar and the
rear shock tower.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the die-cast joints.
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution! 3
Check that there are no cracks in the rear shock
tower.
In the event of damage, the entire rear end
3
module must be replaced.
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear spar in the jig, bringing it against the
relative seat on the shock tower.
NOTE!
Check that the spar is perfectly horizontal.
4
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.3 Replacing the rear spar
.co
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15 5
Repair methods) thoroughly.
Caution!
Remove the jig only once the weld areas are
es
5
cool.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Material necessary -
B A B
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
spars.
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear upper trellis in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
5. Fit the rear spoiler, the rear bumper, the grilles and
the taillights.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.4 Replacing the rear upper trellis
.co
es
7
brackets (A).
A
-g
8
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
11
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
spars. 2
2 2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.5 Replacing the flank mounting bracket
.co
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
spars.
3 3
es
3
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
spar.
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
6
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
8 8
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
When welding the flank mounting bracket, there
is a risk of the spar (B) buckling as a result of B
the heat.
10
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
11
12
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.5 Replacing the flank mounting bracket
.co
ಶ Check the clearance dimensions, rework if necessary.
Remove connected parts for subsequent painting.
es
uid
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A 1
Caution!
Take care not to damage the rear shock tower.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the upper trellis mounting bracket in the jig,
centring with the bushing (A). A
B
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously. A 5
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.7 Finishing the rear end module
Preliminary ಶ Place the rear end module on the vehicle bench using
procedures the specific jigs.
.co
es
Replacement parts • Rear upper trellis (A)
uid
D
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Caution!
Do not reuse screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Check that the flank mounting brackets are
flush with the spars.
2 2
2
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NOTE!
Check that the trellis is perfectly horizontal.
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
4.7 Finishing the rear end module
.co
figure.
es
6
7 7
-g
all
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
3.2 Replacing the underwindscreen rib and the windscreen valence cross-member 5.1 hours
Copyright © 2010
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
4.8 Replacing the rear subframe see F458 Italia workshop manual
Copyright © 2010
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 1 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Adapter
(900027010)
900027010
for tool AV
26300.
m
Adaptor
95973537
(AV 3537)
.co
AV 3537 valve seat X
guide
installer
punch.
Adaptor
95973604
es
(AV 3604)
for angular
AV 3604
engine
timing
reference
tool.
uid
Adaptor
95973606
(AV 3606)
for trolley
(900026230)
-g
for
AV 3606 X X X
transporting
and
handling
engine-
all
gearbox
assembly.
Blocks
95976156
(AV 6156)
AV 6156
for adjusting
the exhaust
system.
Bore gauge
ALZF
(ALZF
04702
04702)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 2 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
for checking
big end
diameter.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 3 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 61
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sess
Fiorano
Bushing (AV
3350)
for upper
AV 3350 pump
assembly
fastener
screws.
Calibre (ALZF
09206)
92 mm
ALZF 09206 X
diameter for
cylinder
sleeves.
Calibre
(TLDF006108)
TLDF006108 for checking
valve guide
wear.
Extractor
95972714_1
AV 2714 (AV 2714) X X X
front crankcase
cover.
Extractor
95972734 (AV
AV 2734 2734) X X X
oil seal for
valve.
False cylinder
sleeve (AV
3335)
AV 3335
for fitting
pistons into
crankcase.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 4 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Feeler gauge
(CS 107155)
for measuring
CS 107155
axial
connecting
rod endfloat.
Goniometer
95975784_2
AM 105784 (AM 105784) X
for setting
engine timing
Go/no-go
gauge
TLDF02060 95972060
(TLDF02060)
for small end.
Handle
900026300 (900026300) X
punches.
Index
95973430
(AV 3430)
AV 3430
timing
reference
marker.
Insertion tool
95972944
(AV 2944)
AV 2944
for fitting seal
ring onto
valve guide.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 5 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Pressure
95971243 gauge
( 95971243)
Punch
(900026550)
for installing
900026550 X
crankshaft
bearing,
clutch side.
Punch
(900026590)
for
900026590 mounting oil X
seal on front
crankcase
cover.
Punch
(900027000)
for
mounting
900027000 X
cylinder
head
alignment
dowel.
Punch
(900027050)
for
mounting
pump
900027050 assembly X
Corteco seal
ring on
lower
crankcase
shell.
Punch
(900027060)
for
900027060 X
mounting
Corteco seal
ring on
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 6 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
flywheel
side of
crankshaft.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 7 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Punch
95972178
(AS
AS 102178)
X X
102178 for installing
valve
guides, Ø 7
mm
Punch
95972692
(AV 2692)
AV 2692
for
extracting
valve guide.
Screw
95973435
(AV 3435)
AV 3435 goniometer X
connector
hub (AM
105784).
Screwdriver
95973002
(AV 3002)
AV 3002 X X X
for installing
piston pin
rings.
Sheet
95973608
(AV 3608)
for
AV 3608 X
protecting
intake
orifices in
heads.
Special
wrench
(900027020)
for installing
900027020
variable
valve timing
adjuster on
camshaft.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 8 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Supports
95973135 (AV
3135)
AV 3135 X X X
for checking
camshaft
(concentricity).
Tensiometer
(95978151)
95978151 X X X X X X X X
Seem
DIAPAZ.
Tool (AM
107064)
AM mounting for
107064 crankcase on
AV 2621
trolley.
Tool (AM
AM 107080)
107080 for supporting
head.
Tool (AV
3311)
for fitting
AV 3311
gear/drive
chain
assembly.
Tool (AV
3333)
for mounting
cable grommet
AV 3333
clips for
variable valve
timing adjuster
solenoid valve.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 9 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Tool (AV
3843)
for
immobilising
AV 3843 camshafts,
with 30 mm
diam.
hexagonal
head.
Tool
(1870736000)
1870736000 for removing X X X X X
fuel pump
ring nut.
Tool
(900026610)
900026610 cylinder X
sleeve
extractor.
Tool
(900026970)
900026970 for cleaning
head
conduits.
Tool
(900027030)
900027030 for fitting
pump drive
shaft.
Tool
(900027040)
900027040 for fitting
pump unit
bearing.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 10 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95970737
(AV 737)
AV
dial gauge X X
737
for
measuring
piston TDC.
Tool
95972916
(CS 102916)
CS cylinder
X X X
102916 sleeve
projection
measurement
dial gauge.
Tool
95972926
AV (AV 2926)
X X X
2926 for
extracting
valve guides.
Tool
95972955
(AV 2955)
AV
for checking X X
2955
the
connecting
rod.
Tool
95973122
AV (AV 3122)
X
3122 for
immobilising
crankshaft
Tool
95973603
AV (AV 3603)
X
3603 for
immobilising
camshafts
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 11 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95973605
(AV 3605)
for centring
and
AV
installing
3605
check valve
on right and
left hand
m
cylinder
banks.
Tool
.co
95973607
(AV 3607)
for
AV immobilising
3607 crankshaft
for damper
installation
es
(with engine
in vehicle)
Tool
95973838
uid
(AV 3838)
AV for manually
3838 checking
variable
valve timing
adjuster.
-g
Tool
95973844
AV (AV 3844)
X X X
3844 for fitting
right hand
all
float valve.
Tool
95973845
AV (AV 3845)
X X X
3845 for fitting
left hand
float valve.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 12 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Tool
95974488
(CS 104488)
CS dial gauge
104488 for
measuring
piston
T.D.C.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 13 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95977231
(AM
AM
107231) X
107231
for installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Tools
95973602
(AV 3602)
AV 3602 X X X
for installing
water-oil
pump.
Torque
wrench end
F9x12/17
fitting
(F9x12/17)
Torque
wrench
95973305 FACOM
S.405DA
(95973305)
Torque
wrench
95978172
(AV 8172)
AV 8172 (Replaces X X X X X X X X
torque
wrench
USAG
815F)
Trolley
(900026230)
for
transporting
900026230 and X X X
handling
engine-
gearbox
assemblies
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 14 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 15 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Trolley
95972621
(AV 2621)
for
AV 2621 X X X X X
overhauling
engine-
gearbox
assemblies
Wrench
(AV 6038)
for
detaching
AV 6038
delivery
pipe from
pump to
steering box.
Wrench
USAGD156
(95971560)
95971560 X X X X X
for
tightening
oil filter.
Wrench
(900026990)
for variable
valve timing
900026990
adjuster
control
valve oil
filter.
Base
95973614
(AV 3614)
for
assembling
AV 3614
double
gearing and
bearings on
secondary
shaft.
Bearing
pusher
AV 3617
95973617
(AV 3617)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 16 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
for
removing
tapered
roller
bearing on
cover side.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 17 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Centring
screws
95973251
AV
(AV 3251)
3251
for shaft-rod
cluster with
forks.
Extractor
95972714
AV (AV 2714)
X X X
2714 for the
differential
flange.
Extractor
95973045
AV (AV 3045)
X X X
3045 for the
differential
flange.
Extractor
95973272
(AV 3272)
AV for 3rd - 4th
3272 gear
synchroniser
on main
shaft.
Flange
95973244
(AV 3244)
gearbox
AV
housing seal
3244
for
measuring
rolling
torque.
Insert
95973837
AV
(AV 3837)
3837
Facom
D.27.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 18 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Pin
95973831
(AV 3831)
AV centring
3831 pin for
bevel gear
pair crown
installation.
Plate
95973536
AV (AV 3536)
3536 for
pressure
seal test.
Pliers
95973612
(AV 3612)
for crown
pinion
AV
clearance
3612
gauge
(used in
conjunction
with AV-
3266).
Polygonal
wrench
95973048
AV (AV 3048)
3048 hydraulic
clutch
control
stud bolt.
Punch
95973075
(AV 3075)
for driving
AV
flexible pin
3075
onto the
bearing
mounting
bushing
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 19 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Punch
95973079
(AV 3079)
AV for centring
X X X
3079 the
complete
thrust
bearing.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 20 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Punch
95973268
(AV 3268)
AV
for fitting
3268
the retainer
washer (Ø
14 mm).
Punch
95973270
(AV 3270)
AV
for fitting
3270
the retainer
washer (Ø
25 mm).
Ring nut
(AV 8066)
for
AV
removing X X X X X
8066
oil tank
cap with
F1 kit.
Stud bolt
95973611
(AV 3611)
AV
union for
3611
die-casting
gearbox
element.
Support
95973248
AV (AV 3248)
3248 for
gearbox
housing.
Templates
95978073
(AV 8073)
for
AV
locating
8073
the Power
Unit pipes
and
actuator
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 21 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool (AV
3375)
for replacing
AV
upper rubber
3375
bushing on
gearbox
housing.
m
Tool (AV
8065)
AV
for topping X X X X X
8065
up oil with
.co
F1 kit.
Tool
95973070
AV
(AV 3070) X X X X X
3070
disengaging
es
the clutch.
Tool
95973080
uid
AV (AV 3080)
3080 for thrust
bearing
centring.
Tool
95973218
-g
AV (AV 3218)
X X X
3218 for removing
the roller
race.
all
Tool
95973219
(AV 3219)
for replacing
AV
upper rubber
3219
bushing on
gearbox
housing (4
components).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 22 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Se
Fiorano
Tool 95973234 (AV
3234)
AV
for replacing lower
3234
bushing on gearbox
housing (8 components)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 23 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool 95973259
AV (AV 3259)
3259 for fitting roller
bearing outer ring.
Tool 95973260
(AV 3260)
for
AV
extracting/inserting
3260
gearbox housing
bearing (2
components).
Tool 95973261
AV (AV 3261)
3261 for fitting clutch
shaft bearing.
Tool 95973262
(AV 3262)
AV for fitting the
3262 spacer and the 1st
and 2nd gear
synchroniser body.
Tool 95973263
(AV 3263)
AV for assembling
3263 various
components on
secondary shaft.
Tool 95973264
(AV 3264)
AV
for fitting the ball X X X
3264
bearing onto the
primary shaft.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 24 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95973265
(AV 3265)
for fitting
AV bearing and
3265 bushing on
the
intermediate
plate (4
components).
Tool
95973266
AV
(AV 3266) X X X
3266
for checking
pinion play.
Tool
95973267
AV
(AV 3267)
3267
for installing
ball bushing.
Tool
95973271
(AV 3271)
AV
for locating
3271
the gear shift
control lever
on the rod.
Tool
95973273
(AV 3273)
AV
for extracting
3273
shaft-rod
cluster with
forks.
Tool
95973275
(AV 3275)
AV for fitting the
X X X
3275 external ball
bearing ring
(2
components).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 25 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 26 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool 95973276
(AV 3276)
for fitting the
AV bearing onto
X X X
3276 differential
shaft with
flange (2
components).
m
Tool 95973277
(AV 3277)
for fitting
AV bearing onto
.co
3277 differential half
-shaft with
flange on left-
hand side.
Tool 95973278
(AV 3278)
es
for fitting the
AV
tapered X X X
3278
differential
bearings (2
components).
uid
Tool 95973613
(AV 3613)
for checking
AV
bush between
3613
bevel gear pair
pinion and
-g
bearing seat.
Tool 95973615
(AV 3615)
all
AV
for
3615
removing/fitting
hook.
Tool 95973616
(AV 3616)
AV for removing
3616 tapered roller
bearing on
cover side.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 27 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95973832
AV (AV 3832)
3832 for fitting
oil circuit
seal.
Tool
95973833
(AV 3833)
for fitting
AV
outer roller
3833
bearing
tapered
ring on
cover.
Tool
95973834
(AV 3834)
AV for fitting
3834 tapered
roller
bearing on
cover side.
Tool
95973835
(AV 3835)
AV
support
3835
tool for
fitting
bearing.
Tool
95973836
(AV 3836)
AV adapter
3836 tool for
piston
Corteco
seal ring.
Tool
95973846
AV (AV 3846)
3846 for
flushing E-
DIFF
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 28 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
hydraulic
system.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 29 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95976121
(AM
106121)
AM
for fitting X X X
106121
1st and 2nd
gear
synchroniser
sleeve.
Tool
95976524
(CS
106524)
CS
for checking
106524
gap between
pinion and
the bearing
seat.
Union
95973283
AV (AV 3283)
X X X
3283 to keep the
air under
pressure.
Wrench
95973245
(AV 3245)
for fastening
AV
the main
3245
shaft ring
nut and
check ring
nut.
Wrench
95973246
(AV 3246)
AV for fastening
3246 the main
shaft
shoulder
ring nut.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 30 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Wrench
95973247
(AV 3247)
for
AV
secondary
3247
shaft
bearing
retainer ring
nut.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 31 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Plug (AS 10723
-07)
AS
for supporting
10723
upper arm for
-07
ball joint
removal.
m
AV 14)
3427- lower leverage
14 surface for ball
joint removal.
AV
3206
Support
95973206 (AV
3206)
for complete
hub.
.co X X X X X X X X
es
Tool 95971651
AV (AV 1651)
X X X
uid
Tool 95973189
(AV 3189)
AV
-g
for removing X X X X X
3189
Flanbloc and
ball joint.
all
Tool 95973217
(AV 3217)
for
AV
fitting/removing X X
3217
lower shock
absorber
Silentblock.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 32 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool 95973281
(AV 3281)
AV
leverage surface X X X X X
3281
for installing
Flanbloc.
Tool 95973282
(AV 3282)
AV
for fitting and X X X X X
3282
removing
Flanbloc.
Tool 95973304
(AV 3304)
AV for
3304 removing/fitting
shock absorber
bushing.
Frame
95973307 (AV
AV
3307)
3307
for supporting
hard top.
Frame
95975736 (AV
AV
5736)
5736
for lifting hard
top.
Tool kit
95972004 ()
for replacing
hard top rear
screen.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 33 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Tool
95978072
(AV 8072)
for aligning
AV 8072 the cosmetic
tailpipe tips
with the
exhaust
tailpipes
Shim
95978170
(AV 8170)
AV 8170 for locating
the engine
compartment
lid window.
Boring bar
95974736
(AS 4736)
AS 4736 X X
for cylinder
bank, Ø
66.675 mm.
Calibre
(ALZF
08902)
ALZF
89 mm X X
08902
diameter for
cylinder
sleeves.
Calibre
(TLDF00754)
TLDF00754 for valve X X
guides, Ø 7
mm
Complete
goniometer
95975165
AM
(AM X X
105165/20
105165/20)
for setting
engine timing
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 34 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Dial gauge
mounting
95977148
CS 7148 (CS 7148) X X
for measuring
valve seat
wear.
Index
95970208
AM (AM
X X
105165/21 105165/21)
for engine
timing.
Insertion tool
95972627
(AV 2627)
AV 2627 X X
for rear
crankshaft
seal ring
Lapper
95970240
AV 240 (AV 240) X X
cylinder
bank.
Plug gauge
95970206
(TLDF02068)
TLDF02068 X X
for checking
small end
bushing.
Protection
95972945
AV 2945 (AV 2945) X X
for installing
valve oil seal.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 35 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Punch
95970866
(AV 865)
AV
for X X
865
connecting
rod
bushing.
Punch
95972727
(AV 2727)
for
AV installing
X X
2727 front
crankcase
cover
“Corteco”
seal ring.
Punch
95972740
(AV 2740)
AV
for X X
2740
installing
check
valve.
Punch
95973011
(AV 3011)
for
AV
installing X X
3011
engine
cover seal
ring, clutch
side.
Punch
95973052
AV (AV 3052)
X X
3052 for fitting
camshaft
pulleys.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 36 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Punch
95973106
(AV 3106)
AV for fitting
X X
3106 front
timing
cover
bearing.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 37 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Reamer
95974720
US
(US 4720) X X
4720
camshaft
seat
Shim
95973345
AV
(AV 3345) X X
3345
punch AV
102178.
Support
95972905
AV (AV 2905)
X X
2905 for
polygonal
wrench.
Support
95974994
(AS
AS 104994)
X X
104994 for
crankcase
on trolley
AV 2621.
Tool (AV
3287)
for
AV securing
X X
3287 crankshaft
onto AS
104994
mounting.
Tool
95972607
(AV 2607)
AV for
X X
2607 installing
camshaft
drive
bearing.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 38 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95972697
(AV 2697)
AV
for X X
2697
installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Tool
95972882
(AV 2881)
AV
for X X
2881
installing
valve oil
seal.
Tool
95973546
AV (AV 3546-
3546- 01) X X
01 for dumper
anti-rotation
in vehicle.
Tool
95975774
(AM
AM 105774)
X X
105774 for
installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Torque
wrench
(USAG
USAG 815F)
X X
815F (Replaced
by torque
wrench AV
8172)
Wrench
95970815_1
(AV 815)
AV
for timing X X
815
system
drive pulley
ring nuts.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 39 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 40 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Wrench
AV 95972906
X X
2906 (AV 2906)
polygonal.
Wrench
95973400
AV
(AV 3400) X X
3400
for engine
oil filter.
Adaptor
95973300
AV
(AV 3300) X X X
3300
for tool
AM106628.
Base
95973415
(AV 3415)
AV for
X X X
3415 removing
the bearing
race from
the pinion.
Jig
95976226
(AM
106226)
AM for fitting
X X X
106226 central
gearbox
housing
onto rear
housing.
Jig
95976227
(AM
AM 106227)
X X X
106227 for fitting
front
gearbox
housing
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 41 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
onto the
central
housing.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 42 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Pin
95972679
(AV 2679)
for
AV locating
X X X
2679 the 3rd,
4th, 5th,
6th
gearbox
rods.
Pin
95972881
(AS
AS 102881)
X X
102881 for
aligning
clutch
plate.
Punch
95972640
(AV 2640)
AV for fitting
X X X
2640 the bearing
onto the
secondary
shaft.
Punch
95972644
(AV 2644)
AV
for the X X X
2644
primary
shaft
bearing.
Punch
95972647
(AV 2647)
AV for fitting
X X X
2647 the bearing
onto the
primary
shaft.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 43 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Punch
95972649
AV (AV
X X X
2649/1 2649/1)
for fitting
bushings
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 44 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Punch
95972649
AV 2649/2 (AV 2649/2) X X X
for fitting
bushings
Punch
95972655
(AV 2655)
AV 2655 X X X
for the
primary shaft
bearing.
Punch
95973297
AV 3297 (AV 3297) X X X
for bushing
extraction.
Punch
95976629
(AM 106629)
AM 106629 X X X
for fitting seat
ring on front
cover.
Shim
95970152
ALZF08501 (ALZF08501) X X X
for tool
AV3415.
Shim
95973413
AV 3413 (AV 3413) X X X
for AV3275
tool.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 45 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Shim
95973414
(AV 3414)
AV
bearing X X X
3414
location for
tool AV
2622.
Shim
95973418
AV
(AV 3418) X X X
3418
for tool AV
3275.
Support
95977312_1
(AS
107312)
AS for fitting
X X X
107312 gearbox
housing
onto AV
2621
trolley.
Tool
95972572
(AV 2572)
AV
for locating X X X
2572
the 1st, 2nd
and reverse
gear fork.
Tool
95972573
(AV 2573)
AV
for locating X X X
2573
the 3rd, 4th,
5th, 6th
gear fork.
Tool
95972617
(AV 2617)
AV
for fitting X X X
2617
external
bearing
track onto
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 46 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
gearbox
housing.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 47 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95972622
(AV 2622)
AV
for fitting X X X
2622
the bearing
onto the
pinion.
Tool
95972629
(AV 2629)
for fitting
AV
the bearing X X X
2629
onto the
central
gearbox
housing.
Tool
95972630
(AV 2630)
for fitting
AV
the bearing X X X
2630
onto the
rear
gearbox
housing.
Tool
95972646
(AV 2646)
AV for fitting
X X X
2646 the outer
roller
bearing
seat.
Tool
95972907
(AV 2907)
AV for fitting
X X X
2907 the outer
roller
bearing
seat.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 48 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Tool
95973411
AV (AV 3411)
X X X
3411 spacer for
tool
AV2622.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 49 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95973418
AV
(AV 3418) X X X
3418
for fitting the
case.
Tool
95973419
AV (AV 3419)
X X X
3419 for centring
the side
cover lever.
Tool
95973458
(AV 3458)
for centring
AV shaft
X X X X X
3458 clearance
between the
universal
joint and the
actuator.
Tool
95975898
AM (AM
X X X
105898 105898)
for pinion
retention.
Tool
95976122
(AM
106122)
AM
for fitting X X X
106122
3rd, 4th, 5th,
6th and
reverse gear
synchroniser.
Tool
95976628
AM (AM
X X X
106628 106628)
for fitting
crown wheel
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 50 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
onto
differential.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 51 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
95976636
(AM
AM 106636)
X X X
106636 for
supporting
the
differential.
m
Wrench
95972054
AV (AV 2054)
X X
2054 for clutch
.co
shaft ring
nut.
Wrench
95972631
(AV 2631)
es
AV for the
X X X
2631 primary shaft
ring nut,
differential
side.
uid
Wrench
95972632
AV (AV 2632)
X X
2632 for clutch
shaft ring
nut.
-g
Wrench
95972633
(AV 2633)
for the
all
secondary
AV shaft ring nut
X X X
2633 on engine
side and the
primary shaft
ring nut on
differential
side.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 52 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Wrench
95973412
(AV 3412)
for the
AV
intermediate X X X
3412
ring nut on
secondary
shaft (3
components).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 53 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Wrench
95975177
(AM
105177)
AM
for fastening X X X
105177
the primary
shaft ring
nut on the
engine side.
Tool (AV
AV
3427-13)
3427- X X X X X
for fitting
13
Flanbloc.
Tool (AV
5225-2)
AV leverage
X X X X X
5225-2 surface for
extracting
Flanbloc.
Tool
95977310
(AM
AM 107310)
X X X X X
107310 leverage
surface for
installing
Flanbloc.
Tool
95977311
(AM
107311)
AM
leverage X X X X X
107311
surface for
extracting
Flanbloc and
ball joint.
Adapter (AV
3980)
AV
support for X
3980
valve seat
wear
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 54 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
measurement
dial gauge.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 55 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Belt
tensioner
(AV 8171)
AV
setting the X X X
8171
alternator
belt
tension.
Boring bar
95977233
AS (AS
X
107233 107233)
cylinder
bank.
Engine
bushing
installation
template
(AV 8169)
AV
for X X X
8169
checking
alignment
of rubber
engine
bushings.
Hook (AV
3979)
AV
for X X X X
3979
hoisting
engine.
Hook
95973432
AV (AV 3432)
X X X X
3432 for
hoisting
engine.
Kit (AV
3981)
AV press-
X
3981 fitting
water pipes
on engine.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 56 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Kit (AV
3982)
AV 3982 press-fitting X
oil pipes on
engine.
Lapper
m
95973429
AV 3429 (AV 3429) X
cylinder
bank.
Lever
95973433
AV 3433 (AV 3433)
for fitting
.co X
es
timing chain
Punch
(900027260)
for
uid
mounting 6
900027260 X
mm
diameter
centring
dowel.
Punch
-g
(900027270)
for
mounting 13
900027270 X
mm
all
diameter
centring
dowel.
Reamer (US
19000)
hand reamer
US 19000 X
for ø26 mm
camshaft
seats
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 57 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Shield (AV
3983)
AV
intake X X X
3983
header
cover.
Tool (AM
107256)
AM
for X
107256
installing
half cones.
Tool (AV
3374)
AV for
X
3374 installing
oil seal on
valve.
Tool (AV
AV 3978)
X
3978 for timing
reference
Tool (AV
3984)
for
aligning
cylinder
AV
sleeves X
3984
(used
together
with tool
AM
107231).
Tool (AV
3985)
for
AV checking
X
3985 variable
valve
timing
adjuster.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 58 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 59 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 6
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sess
Fiorano
Tool (900027360)
for immobilising
900027360 crankshaft for X X X
removing/refitting
dumper.
Tool 95972885
(AV 2885)
AV 2885 X
for fitting oil
sump bearing.
Tool 95973434
(AV 3434)
for fitting O-rings
AV 3434 on crankcase and X
lower crankcase
shell fastener stud
bolts.
Tool 95977232
(AM 107232)
AM
mounting for X
107232
crankcase on AV
2621 trolley.
Wrench (AV
3390)
AV 3390 for installing oil X
filters for timing
adjusters.
Templates
95978076 (AV
AV 8076 8076) X X X X
locating F1
gearbox kit pipes.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 60 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Tool
(900026250)
900026250 for complete X X X
clutch
mount.
Tools
95973218
(AV 3218)
AV 3218 X X X
for fitting the
seal ring (3
components).
354 mm
template
(AV 8168)
for setting
correct
AV 8168 distance X
between
chassis and
gearbox
(mechanical
gearbox).
Tool (AV
3994)
for adjusting
engine
AV 3994 X X X
compartment
lid striker
plate retainer
bracket.
Exhaust
tailpipe
extensions
95978177
AV 8177 (AV 8177) X
for
connection to
exhaust fume
extractor.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 61 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Tool
95977566
AS
(AS 107566) X
107566
for removing
the oil sump.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 62 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Trolley
95977565
(AS
107565)
AS removing
X X X
107565 the
engine /
gearbox /
subframe
assembly.
Wrench
95978175
(AV 8175)
AV tightening
X X X
8175 fuel pump
filter
retainer
ring.
Wrench
95978176
AV (AV 8176)
X X X
8176 tightening
fuel level
sensor.
Hook
95977564
(AS
AS
107564) X X X
107564
for lifting
the
gearbox.
Pump
95978174
(AV 8174)
AV
topping up X X X
8174
gearbox
and clutch
oil.
Bar
95977568
AS (AS
X
107568 107568)
support for
RHT
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 63 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
kinematics
L=1100.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 64 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Bar
95977570
(AS
AS 107570)
X
107570 support for
RHT
kinematics
L=806.
Fastener
brackets
for safety
retainers
95978184
(AV 8184)
AV raised
X X X
8184 vehicle
anti-
tipping
retention
for runway
type car
lifts.
Feeler
gauge
95978181
(AV 8181)
AV
checking X
8181
Rear Roof
shell
striker
plates
Hook
95977567
AS (AS
X
107567 107567)
installing
the RHT.
Riveter
Battery
Tool
95978173
AV
(AV 8173) X X
8173
(see repair
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 65 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Rod
95978178
AV
(AV 8178) X
8178
for RHT
kinematics.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 66 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 6
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Ses
Fiorano
Safety
retainers
95978183 (AV
AV 8183 8183) X X X
vehicle anti-
tipping
retention.
Separator tool
m
95978179 (AV
8179)
AV 8179 adjusting the X
Rear Roof
.co
shell striker
plates
Template kit
(A7082600 -
A7082600/TIN
A7082600 -
- A456)
es
A7082600/TIN X
(see repair
- A456
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
uid
Template
95978180 (AV
8180)
AV 8180 X
locating Rear
Roof shell
striker plates
-g
Template
95978182 (AV
8182)
AV 8182 X
checking Rear
all
Roof shell
striker plates
Tool 95977569
(AS 107569)
AS 107569 support for X
hydraulic
pump.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 67 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Trolley
95977571 (AS
AS 107571)
X
107571 support for
complete
RHT.
Brackets for
fastening to
engine and
clutch housing
AV
shims X
8252
95978252 (AV
8252)
for hoisting
engine.
Engine retainer
bracket for
gearbox
AV removal
X
8254 95978254 (AV
8254)
removing the
gearbox.
Tailpipe cowl
for exhaust
fume
extraction
AV 95978250 (AV
X
8250 8250)
for use
exclusively
together with
one of the
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 68 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
extension
elements AV
8177 for
connection to
an exhaust gas
extraction
system.
Template
95978257 (AV
AV
8257) X
8257
fitting flexible
exhaust pipe.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 69 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Trolley 95977572
(AS 107572)
to be used
together with
AS
trolley AS X
107572
107565 for
removing/refitting
gearbox from and
into vehicle.
Mounting bracket
for vehicle safety
retainers for
AV
lifting 95978251 X
8251
(AV 8251)
lifting vehicle on
vehicle lift.
Safety extensions
95977513 (AS
107573)
AS
for trolley AS X
107573
107565 for
removing/refitting
rear subframe.
Spacers
95978255 (AV
8255)
AV
for trolley AS X
8255
107565 for
removing/refitting
rear subframe.
Brackets
95978259 (AV
AV
8259) X
8259
compressing fuel
pump springs
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 70 of 70
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Template kit
(A7082900
-
A7082900 - A7082900/T
A7082900/T - A456) X
- A456 (see repair
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
Consultation Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
01.01 Consultation
The manual is divided into sections, with each section identified by a different letter.
Each section is divided into chapters, identified by the letter indicating the relative section followed by a
m
sequential number.
Each chapter is, in turn, divided into paragraphs, identified by the letter indicating the relative section, the
chapter number and a sequential number, separated from the former by a point.
This format is used for all references to chapters or paragraphs in other sections.
The chapter or paragraph containing the notes relative to a certain topic may be identified by consulting the
.co
table of contents at the beginning of each section.
To illustrate the topic more clearly, the text is supplemented by illustrations in which the elements described are
highlighted and/or identified with numerical references.
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Updates Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
01.02 Updates
Updates
The manual will be updated periodically to reflect modifications made to the vehicle and the production of new
versions.
ALWAYS read the Technical Notes as they may introduce more recently updated regulations and methods than
those in this manual.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Symbols Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
01.03 Symbols
The safety symbols given below are used to warn the operator of personal safety hazards and operational
conditions which may cause damage to the vehicle, and to provide useful information concerning the
operation being performed.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the instructions given in this note may result in serious injury to the operator and/or to
persons in the immediate vicinity.
IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the instructions given in this note may damage the vehicle and its components irreparably.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
This symbol indicates recommendations for the protection of the environment.
NOTES
This general note provides operators with useful information concerning the operation being performed.
REFERENCE
Reference to a section or chapter dealing with the operation being performed.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Glossary Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
01.04 Glossary
N2
Nitrogen
CO
Carbon Monoxide
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
NOx
Nitrogen Oxide
HC
Hydrocarbons
Standard
Service limit
Indicates the limit value beyond which a part or coupling must be serviced to bring it back within the prescribed
tolerance range
The terms right hand and/or left hand indicate the right hand and/or left-hand side of the vehicle with respect to
the front of the vehicle
ABS
CST
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Glossary Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A.C.
(Air Conditioning)
ASR
CAN
PTC
NTC
E-DIFF
(Electronic Differential)
EBD
ECU
MSR
NO
NC
RHT
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Glossary Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
EPB
LC
(Launch Control)
AVH
m
DCT
.co
TPMS
FBP
A system that eliminates the gap between the brake pads and discs by applying slight pressure to the brake
es
system as soon as the accelerator pedal is released when imminent braking is expected. (Ferrari Brake
Prefill)
VDC
uid
Vehicle dynamics control using the brake system and engine torque
PTU
4WD
-g
(4 Wheel Drive)
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Manual user Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Manual user
This publication was produced by the FERRARI Technical Service Department as an informative support tool to
assist the operator in performing work on FERRARI cars.
This manual is intended for expert operators with sufficient knowledge and skill to carry out all maintenance and
repair operations for FERRARI cars correctly and safely.
Carrying out the aforementioned operations without the necessary knowledge and skills will cause damage to
the vehicle and may expose the operator and the user of the vehicle to danger.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_020... 8/1/2011
Operating procedures Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Operating procedures
The operator must observe the instructions and warnings given in the manual precisely and must not implement
inappropriate methods or tools, as this may constitute a risk to personal safety and compromise the reliability
of the vehicle.
In addition to the guided diagnostic system, that can be implemented using the FERRARI DEIS tester, each
section of the manual contains diagnostic procedures to identify malfunctions of the different components in
the vehicle.
Evaluating the impressions of the user is of vital importance, formulating appropriate questions to clearly identify
the symptoms of the problem.
Once the cause has been identified, plan the job by consulting the relative informative notes concerning the
tools necessary, the reference data for servicing and disassembly and reassembly procedures given in the
manual.
Following the methods described in this manual precisely for each job ensures the safety of the user and the
quality of the vehicle.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_020... 8/1/2011
Using tools and spare parts Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
FERRARI supplies workshops authorised to repair its vehicles with specific tools to ensure that repair work is
carried out correctly and safely.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty.
Always use original FERRARI spare parts, consulting the relative spare parts catalogue.
In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original components may damage the vehicle and expose the user
to danger.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_020... 8/1/2011
Warranty Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
02.04 Warranty
FERRARI guarantees its vehicles for 3 years from the date of delivery.
The warranty may be extended if required. For details, see the specific documents "Power brochure"
and "Power warranty handbook". For more information, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty. Always use original FERRARI spare parts,
consulting the relative spare parts catalogue. In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original
components may damage the vehicle and expose the user to danger.
During this period, the appropriate form must be filled out and the S.T. Schedule, which indicates the time
specified by FERRARI for the operation, must be consulted for any work on the vehicle.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_020... 8/1/2011
Tightening torques Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
For the fastening of main vehicle components, Ferrari has defined three tolerance classes relative to the rated
torque value: The tolerance class is shown in the summary paragraphs concerning tightening torques, at the
beginning of each section and/or at the beginning of each paragraph.
m
Class
A ±5 %
B ±10 %
.co
C ±20 %
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_020... 8/1/2011
Safety at work Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
When carrying out particularly hazardous or difficult service or repair operations, the service staff must take all
precautions to prevent personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
Always wear protective gloves when working on sharp or hot parts, or when handling dangerous parts. In the
latter case, we recommend protecting the eyes with appropriate safety goggles.
Prevent sparks or open flames when working on the fuel system as fuel and fuel vapours are highly flammable.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_030... 8/1/2011
Hazards Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
03.02 Hazards
Exhaust gas
Danger Precautions
The engine must be kept running for certain Never run the engine in a closed space; preferably
maintenance procedures. Exhaust gases contain work outdoors or use exhaust extraction systems.
carbon monoxide, a highly toxic gas which may
even cause death in the event of prolonged
inhalation.
The emissions control devices installed were Never puncture the exhaust silencers or remove any of
necessary in order for the vehicle to obtain type their internal elements. Never use the vehicle with
approval allowing the vehicle to be driven legally on any of these devices removed.
public roads in compliance with emissions and
noise legislation. Removing or tampering with these
devices is prohibited by law.
Each of these devices bears a marking or label Never replace any of the original devices with devices
indicating the type approval number obtained. without type approval. These devices must also be
kept in proper working order, carrying out all the
procedures indicated in the maintenance schedule.
Petrol
Danger Precautions
The petrol contained in the fuel tank and the entire fuel Smoking, sparks and naked flame must not be allowed
system is highly flammable and, in certain in the work area or the immediate vicinity.
conditions, potentially explosive. Keep out of reach of children!
Always work in a well ventilated area.
Never dispose of petrol into the environment!
Used oil
Danger Precautions
Prolonged skin contact with used oil may cause severe Keep out of reach of children!
skin disease. To prevent risks, always wear protective gloves and/or
wash any areas that have come into contact with
used oil thoroughly with soap and water.
Never dispose of used oil into the environment!
Hydraulic fluid
Danger Precautions
The fluid contained in the brake, clutch and power In the event of contact, wash the affected area with
steering systems is corrosive to plastic, rubber and plenty of running water.
paintwork and is extremely harmful in the event of To prevent risks, always wear protective eyewear and
contact with the eyes and skin. gloves.
Keep out of reach of children!
Never dispose of used hydraulic fluid into the
environment!
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_030... 8/1/2011
Hazards Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Coolant
Danger Precautions
The cooling circuit contains fluid at high temperature Keep out of reach of children!
and pressure: contact with hot coolant may cause Never dispose of coolant into the environment!
severe burns. Coolant may cause irritation in the
event of skin contact and is poisonous if swallowed.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_030... 8/1/2011
Dangerous emissions Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Battery
Danger Precautions
As the battery is charged, gases are released which Always charge the battery in a well ventilated area.
are potentially explosive in the event of contact with
sparks or naked flame.
The battery also contains sulphuric acid as an Always wear appropriate protective garments and a
electrolyte, which may cause irritation in the event face mask when handling electrolyte.
of skin contact.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_030... 8/1/2011
Identification and type approval labels Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Identification and type approval labels Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' warning Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Mercury content warning Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Safety standard compliance Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number) Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
D - V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number)
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Airbag maintenance Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Airbag maintenance
E - Airbag maintenance
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Passenger airbag warning Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Unleaded fuel Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Unleaded fuel
G - Unleaded fuel
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Radiator containing antifreeze Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_040... 8/1/2011
Emissions control system specifications Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
I - Emissions control system specifications
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Engine type and number Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Assembly number Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Assembly number
M - Assembly number
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Engine and gearbox oil identification Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Gearbox type and number Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Tyre type and pressure Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
P - Tyre type and pressure
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
TPMS system installed warning Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Chassis number Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Chassis number
R - Chassis number
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Original paint Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Original paint
S - Original paint
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_041... 8/1/2011
Performance and consumption Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Performance
Fuel consumption (estimated figures based on tests conducted with vehicles equipped with frequently
requested options. Figures for 2008 models and later are calculated using EPA methods. The effective
consumption for this vehicle may vary depending on driving style, the state of the vehicle, optional
accessories fitted and the road and weather conditions in which the test is conducted)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_050... 8/1/2011
Dimensions and weights Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_050... 8/1/2011
Fluid properties Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A10... 8/1/2011
Fluids and lubricants table Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Certain products in the fluids and lubricants table are indicated with the names used both prior to and after the
change in nomenclature of Shell fluid products.
The technical characteristics of the products themselves, however, have remained unchanged.
(1) Empty.
(2) Between MIN and MAX 2.11 qts..
(3) Oil consumption 1.06 - 2.11 qts/600 miles.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A10... 8/1/2011
Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI form Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Model Updated on
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI form Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Model Updated on
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI form Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Model Updated on
m
50. - Visual inspection of fuel tanks.
51. – Visual inspection: Suspension units, etc.
52. -Visual inspection of Earth: car/engine and gearbox-chassis.
.co
53. - Condition of brake pads and discs (DO NOT remove wheels).
54. - Condition of tyres and wheel rims.
55. - Refit flat undertray and the engine compartment panels.
56. - Door and lid locks.
57. - Emergency opening of engine compartment lid and fuel tank
flap.
58. - Condition of vehicle's leather upholstery.
es
59. - Condition of vehicle paintwork.
60. - Clean interior and wash car.
61. - Provided with vehicle: Labels, toolkits, etc.
uid
Technical Manager:
-g
Name Surname
(block letters) (block letters)
Company stamp
all
Full signature
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Model Updated on
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
Yearly Maintenance
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
A Vehicle reception - preparation
B Indicator light check
External visual brake inspection (pads and discs); replace if
C
necessary
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years)
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 4 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Model Updated on
m
Chassis number: Dossier creation date:
.co
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil
P tank (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years)
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 4 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Model Updated on
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years)
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 4 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A20... 8/1/2011
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
Replacing ancillary
O1 drive belts (every 37,500 miles/2 years - replace more o o
frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil tank
P (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:02 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter o o
Replacing spark plugs (replace more frequently if the
Z1 o o
vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years) o o
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4 o o
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:02 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
m
Km:
Notes:
.co
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
A Vehicle reception - preparation
B Indicator light check o o
External visual brake inspection (pads and discs); replace if
C o o
necessary
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:01 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:01 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:18 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter o o
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years) o o
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4 o o
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:18 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
Replacing ancillary
O1 drive belts (every 37,500 miles/2 years - replace more o o
frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil tank
P (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:19 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter o o
Replacing spark plugs (replace more frequently if the
Z1 o o
vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years) o o
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4 o o
15 years)
m
o o
a3 Checking the A.C. system o o
Visual inspection of oil and fluid tightness and of
o o
a4 areas subject to fretting (pipes and hoses)
Refitting cover on right hand underwindscreen shield
Final checks (open/close doors, check fuel filler cap and
a5 o o
check seat and seat belt functions)
.co
a6 Checking function of headlights and horn o o
Checking windscreen wiper, windscreen washer and
a7 o o
headlight washer system function
Checking and lubricating controls, adjustment mechanisms in
a8 o o
general, hinges, doors and lids
b Lifting the vehicle
c Visual inspection for leaks o o
c1 Checking radiators for fouling; clean if necessary o o
es
d Refitting the rear flat undertray section
d1 Refitting the rear bumper diffuser
f Setting the vehicle on the ground
g Service counter reset o o
g1 DEIS Diagnosis o o
h Road test (vehicle test) o o
i Car wash and cleaning interiors (optional) o o
uid
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
all
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:19 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter o o
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years) o o
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4 o o
15 years)
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Page 1 of 3
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011
1 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1 o o
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
2 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
g Service counter reset o o
g1 DEIS Diagnosis o o
g2 Adjusting idle speed o o
h Road test (vehicle test) o o
i Car wash and cleaning interiors (optional) o o
L Treating interior trim in leather (if necessary) o o
m
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
(block letters) (block letters)
.co
Stamp with company trading name
Full signature
3 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
A3.01 Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication system filters
The oil level must be checked with the vehicle standing on a level surface and with the engine idling.
The symbol shown aside is displayed on the left hand TFT display together with the message "Check engine oil level" to indicate that the engine oil level
must be checked.
Proceed as follows:
1. Warm the engine to an engine oil temperature of 90 °C.
2. Run the engine at idle speed.
3. Wait 2 minutes, then open the engine compartment lid and undo the engine oil tank cap (1).
If the oil level is too low, identify the cause for excessive oil consumption before refilling.
The space between the MIN and MAX notches corresponds to approximately 2 litres of oil.
6. Remove the cap and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX notches on the dipstick.
DO NOT add oils with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.
7. Top up with the specified oil if necessary, taking care not to exceed the MAX level indicated on the dipstick.
1 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication s... https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
After topping up, the "Low oil level" symbol shown aside may remain active on the left hand TFT display for a prolonged period of time. This occurs to
allow the system to perform all the checks necessary. This is completely normal.
9. After adding or replacing oil, check the oil level again using the procedure described above.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the environment.
Undo the two drain plugs (1) on the crankcase and the plug (2) under the engine oil tank.
Replace damaged parts or parts that have been dropped, even if there is no visual damage.
The engine oil filter is mounted on the engine oil heat exchanger, located behind the intake manifold, and is accessible by simply lifting the engine compartment lid.
2 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication s... https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Remove the engine oil filter (A) with a 32 mm socket wrench fitted in the relative seat, an extension (USAG 236
1/2" L = 250mm) and a reversible ratchet.
Turning counterclockwise (as indicated by the arrow), unscrew the complete engine oil filter (A).
On the workbench, detach the filter element (A1) from the cover (A2), releasing the retainer tabs.
There are plastic tabs at the top of the filter element which fasten to the cover.
Dispose of the filter element (A1) correctly in accordance with applicable recycling procedures.
Remove the gasket (1) from the cover (A2), taking particular care not to damage the seal recess.
Replace damaged parts or parts that have been dropped, even if there is no visual damage.
Select a new gasket (1) from the spare parts kit and install on the cover (A2), taking particular care not to
damage the gasket itself and the relative seal recess.
Ensure that the gasket (1) is installed correctly and is not twisted.
Replace damaged parts or parts that have been dropped, even if there is no visual damage.
DO NOT assemble the filter element if the drain pipe O-ring is missing.
Select a new filter element (A1) from the spare parts kit and check that the drain pipe O-ring (2) is installed
correctly
DO NOT fit the filter element directly onto the casting without fastening to the cover first.
Fit the new filter element (A1) onto the cover (A2), ensuring that the plastic retainer tabs click audibly into place.
When installing the filter element, take particular care not to bend or damage the plastic retainer tabs.
If the filter element does not fix correctly to the cover, check that the By-pass valve is still correctly installed
in the cover. If the valve has accidentally detached, replace the cover with a new component. Do not
attempt to repair the By-pass valve, as this may severely compromise filtration.
Check that the filter element (A1) is securely fastened to the cover (A2).
Lubricate the outer edge of the gasket (1) with new engine oil.
3 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication s... https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Fit the complete engine oil filter (A) correctly in the relative seat on the engine, taking care not to damage the
filter during assembly.
Fasten the engine oil filter (A) with a 32 mm socket wrench fitted in the relative seat, an extension (USAG 236
1/2" L = 250mm) and a reversible ratchet.
4 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
A3.02 Inspecting oil level and replacing Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
The following procedures must be carried out exactly as described to ensure that the hydraulics are proper lubricated and function correctly.
m
To check the gear oil level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely as described.
Before carrying out any work concerning the transmission oil level, ensure that:
the vehicle is perfectly levelled on the car lift;
.co
reverse gear is engaged, the brake pedal is depressed and the engine is running at idle speed;
engine coolant temperature is 40 - 50 °C.
CAUTION
HOT OIL may be released: use adequate protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1) located on the rear surface of the transmission, and check the level: the fluid must
reach the edge of the hole from which the plug was removed, on the limit of overflowing.
es
If the level is too low, identify the possible causes for excessive consumption before refilling.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 (with the short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a newly
opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 and a container for collecting excess oil, top up via the level pipe
until excess oil overflows from the orifice of the cap remove previously.
Let the oil fluid completely until the flow stops.
-g
Plug 25 Nm B
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Inspecting oil level and replacing Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The gear oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Place a container under the plugs indicated in the figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plugs (1) and (2) at the bottom of the gearbox housing.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Clean the plugs (1) and (2) thoroughly with a suitable degreaser that does not leave residue, and replace the
seals.
Tighten the plugs (1) and (2).
Undo the threaded inspection/filler plug (3) located on the rear surface of the transmission.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 (with the short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a newly
opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) element 01 and a container for collecting excess oil, fill with 3.9 litres of oil via the
inspection/filler orifice.
Fill with half of the quantity indicated, wait a few minutes for the fluid to settle, then gradually finish filling, until oil
overflows from the check/filler hole.
The quantity of oil required may vary slightly relative to the amount indicated for filling the tank when empty; this
is due to unavoidable pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
A3.03 Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level
The following procedures must be carried out exactly as described to ensure that the hydraulics are
proper lubricated and function correctly.
To check the hydraulic clutch system fluid level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely as
described.
Before carrying out any work concerning the oil level in the hydraulic clutch system, ensure that:
the vehicle is perfectly levelled on the car lift;
reverse gear is engaged, the brake pedal is depressed and the engine is running at idle speed;
engine coolant temperature is 40 - 50 °C.
CAUTION
HOT OIL may be released: use adequate protection.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Check the fluid level with the level pipe (2): the fluid
must reach the upper edge of the pipe, on the
limit of overflowing.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
The windscreen/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap is located underneath the luggage compartment lid.
A level sensor mounted on the reservoir detects when the windscreen/headlight washer fluid
level is too low and causes the relative warning light on the control panel to light.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking brake system fluid level Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
underwindscreen shield.
.co
The brake fluid reservoir is located at the centre of the luggage compartment, underneath the right hand
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking brake system fluid level Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking brake system fluid level Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking the power steering system fluid level Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
The power steering fluid level must be checked with the system warm, after driving for at least 15 Km.
If checked cold, the level may appear to be excessively low even with the correct amount of fluid in the
system.
At the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE, check the level of liquid in the power steering
system.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking the power steering system fluid level Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking coolant level and topping up Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
CAUTION
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures and pressure.
ALWAYS WORK WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
.co
by the dotted line in the figure aside.
If not, unscrew the cap (A) and top up to the correct
level with the specified fluid.
Fully tighten the filler cap (A) onto the expansion
tank.
es
uid
CAUTION
-g
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures and pressure.
ALWAYS WORK WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking coolant level and topping up Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Checking coolant level and topping up Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 1 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Replace the active carbon filter at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. The filter is located
in front of the left hand rear wheel bay.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 2 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 3 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening active carbon filter mounting bracket to Screw 8 Nm C
chassis
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 4 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 5 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 1 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Whenever a sensor is replaced, the self-acquired parameters must be deleted from the ECU memory.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 2 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 3 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Remove the right hand engine compartment shield.
.co
Remove the rear right hand wheelhouse.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 4 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Whenever a sensor is replaced, the self-acquired parameters must be deleted from the ECU memory.
The rear oxygen sensors are mounted onto the rear of the catalytic converters.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 5 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 6 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 7 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 8 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
Connect the connector (1), attaching onto the
.co
relative mounting bracket.
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A30... 8/5/2011
Replacing the engine air filter Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Prise out and move the air filter box cover (A) out of
its seat.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Replacing the engine air filter Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Remove the air filter (B) from the relevant seat and
replace.
Fit the new air filter (B) in the relevant seat.
Fit the air filter box cover (A) in its relevant seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the air filter
box cover (A) to the air filter box.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Replacing the air conditioning and heating system filter Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
The pollen filter is located under the luggage compartment lid, on the right hand underwindscreen shield.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking tension and replacement of auxiliary utilities belts Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking tension and replacement of auxiliary utilities belts Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
Fit the tensioner (2) and fasten by tightening the
.co
screw (3).
Repeat the ancillary drive belt tension setting procedure described previously.
The engine ancillary drive belt must be replaced at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking tension and replacement of auxiliary utilities belts Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking and replacing spark plugs Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Before refitting the spark plugs, check that they are in good condition and replace if necessary.
Check that the spark plug electrode gap is between 0.6 and 0.7 mm. Oil the threaded part of the spark plug with
very little oil.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking and replacing spark plugs Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check the state of the pipes (1), (2), (3) and the
tightness of the relative clamps, around the oil
tank and intake ducts.
Check the connections. Replace the relative pipe
and/or clamp if any leakage or sweating is noted.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking cooling system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
Remove the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the front flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Check that the pipes and pipe unions on the water pump, the radiator and the expansion tank are undamaged.
Replace any worn pipe unions or loose clamps.
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check the state of the connection pipes between the fuel tank and the high pressure pump, and of the fuel rail
on the intake manifold.
In the event of leakage, replace the pipe and check the system.
Remove the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Check the state of the cables and connectors for the Motronic ECUs and the coils. If the outer casing or the
connector locks are damaged, replace the cable.
In the event of malfunction, check the spark plugs. Replace the spark plugs at the intervals indicated in the
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking exhaust system connections Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check the state of the system components, the connections between the manifolds and the catalytic
converters, and the connections between the catalytic converters and the silencers, then check the
fasteners.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking exhaust emissions Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 1 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
At the intervals indicated in the Maintenance Schedule, check the state of wear of the brake pads and discs.
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove all.
The front brake pads are fitted with a wear indicator connected to the brake failure warning light on the
instrument panel. Should this warning light illuminate, check the thickness of the pads and the state of the
braking surfaces on the discs.
In the event of excessive wear, even of just one pad, replace all the pads on the axle.
The brake discs must be perfectly clean, free of any oil, grease or rust, and must not be excessively scored.
In the event of poor braking performance not attributable to the state of the brake pads and callipers, carry out a
series of dimensional checks on the discs.
Using a dial gauge, measure the planarity with the disc fitted on the wheel hub.
Using a micrometer, measure the parallelism between the contact surfaces and the pads at different points on
the braking surface.
Using the special tool, check the roughness of the pad contact surface.
The rear discs differ from the front discs in that they have two additional holes to enable access to the brake
shoe adjustment pin without removing the disc.
They also have a large friction surface on the inner side for the parking brake.
Normally, both forms of brake disc wear occur simultaneously. Only rarely, following prolonged stress on the
race track with large temperature variations on the friction surface, surface alteration may become so
pronounced as to necessitate earlier replacement of the brake discs.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 2 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The front and rear CCM brake discs must always be replaced in pairs (both discs on the same axle).
Front and rear CCM disc wear is calculated by the instrument panel operating software, which uses an
algorithm to determine when to switch on the relative indicator to warn the driver.
The bedding in procedure must be carried out after replacing discs or the pads alone.
Disc replacement is necessary when the wear limit is reached, as indicated by the relative warning on the
TFT display, or if visual inspection reveals any surface damage.
m
The alterations in the friction surface are caused by the material oxidising as a result of extremely high
thermal stress. The high temperatures reached by the brake discs, especially in race track conditions,
cause the material to oxidise progressively.
Surface alteration is detrimental to braking comfort, reduces brake disc resistance and increases pad wear,
.co
requiring the replacement of components earlier than scheduled.
Understanding the signs of brake disc wear and consequent operations necessary:
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 3 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 4 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
CAUTION
When using pressure cleaners to clean discs, use
adequate face protection.
After severe race track use, visually inspect the appearance of the pads as well as checking for wear. If a
marked white coloration is noted around the edges of the pads, extending almost as far as the metal
backing plate, the pads must be replaced to ensure optimum braking performance.
As the discs wear, their mass reduces. This is due to two simultaneous effects - a thermal effect, which burns
the carbon fibres, and a mechanical abrasion effect between the disc and pad.
The instrument panel operating software uses an algorithm to calculate, in relation to effective vehicle usage
(e.g.: deceleration caused by braking), separate wear indices for the front P(a) and rear P(p) carbon brake
discs, expressed as a percentage (%) of wear.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 5 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
These indices are periodically compared against a threshold value (100%). Upon reaching this threshold, an
amber warning signal (possible danger of disc failure) is shown on the TFT display, warning the user that
disc replacement is necessary.
The user is warned of this condition by the appearance of the message: “CCM brake discs worn” on the
display, together with the specific amber symbol. At the end of the display cycle, or when the MODE button is
pressed (with “Escape” function), the symbol is reduced to icon form.
An RLI for “Number of brake disc replacements” is also generated, identifying the number of times that the discs
have been replaced.
Once the brake discs have been replaced, the wear index may be reset on the instrument panel.
The wear index on the instrument panel may only be reset once the discs have been replaced, after the
index has exceeded 100%.
To maintain a record of the latest brake wear index reset, three values are stored in the statistics memory for the
front and rear brakes, which are updated upon reset (with the possibility of storing the last seven resets):
Number of brake disc changes counter: --------- (dimensionless number)
Kilometres at first disc brake change: --------- Km
Wear percentage at first disc brake change: --------- %
At each service, submit the following data (printing out the parameters from the instrument panel):
vehicle serial number;
vehicle mileage (“Odometer” parameter);
“Disc Wear Index” value.
2 - Replacing one carbon disc (or two discs on same axle) due to failure
In this situation, only one disc (or two discs on the same axle) are replaced, without modifying the parameters
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service brakes for wear Page 6 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Upon approval from SAT (which will verify the data supplied by the dealership), the Spare Parts Department will
confirm the order and supply a spare instrument panel (with the estimated values from the replaced unit).
4 - Replacing a malfunctioning instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument not possible)
Order a spare instrument panel, specifying:
the serial number of the vehicle;
estimated vehicle mileage.
5 - Replacing the carbon discs before reaching wear threshold (“Disc Wear Index” parameter < 100%)
This is a non-standard procedure and may only be performed by authorised personnel. Contact the Ferrari SAT
service.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A31... 8/5/2011
Checking service/parking brake operation and control play Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check the brake pedal travel and STOP light switch function.
Road test the vehicle to check braking performance.
m
Remove the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
Check electric parking brake operation and the state of the parking brake cables.
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking suspension components Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Road test the vehicle to check shock absorber performance and to check for suspension noise.
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove all.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking vehicle set-up Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
The following operations must be performed beforehand to ensure that vehicle set-up parameters are checked
correctly
For optimum vehicle performance, the set-up procedure must be performed accurately.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
A3.23 Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts
With the seat adjustment controls, check that the electrical seats move through their entire adjustment travel
without impediment.
Check that the seat guides are securely fastened to the floor mounts.
Lubricate the guide connections and sliding surfaces with waterproof lithium grease.
Check that the seat belt anchor screws are properly tightened.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 1 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
If you are in doubt about your battery or it if shows signs of inefficiency, check its charge level.
For the purposes of such a check, the battery must be at room temperature (between 15 and 25 °C) and must
have been resting for at least 6 hours, i.e. it must not have been connected to any devices, even if these
absorb only a few milliamperes.
Read the voltage value displayed by the multimeter to two decimal points. If the battery is insufficiently
charged, with a voltage of less than 12.55, either recharge or replace, depending on the voltage measured.
Once the battery has been recharged, make sure it maintains the same charge over time by carrying out a
test under full-load conditions.
To carry out the test, use a battery tester with a current range of 200 to 300 amperes.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 2 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Percentage charge
Higher than 12.70 100
Between 12.45 and 75 ÷ 100
12.70
Between 12.36 and 50 ÷ 75
12.45
Lower than 12.36 0 ÷ 50
m
Check the tester setting regularly.
If the voltage measured under full-load conditions is lower than the voltage indicated in the table, the battery
must be considered faulty and must be replaced.
.co
The battery charging level can be considered sufficient if it is higher than 75 ÷ 80%; the multimeter display
must show voltage levels which are not lower than 12.50÷12.55 Volts.
Recharge the battery ( A3.24).
Perform the procedure if the voltage measured is less than the limit value specified.
You are reminded that, once the battery has been recharged, the voltage of the poles is not a faithful
indication of the charging levels because of the electrolyte stratification inside the battery. This
es
phenomenon occurs when the electrolyte has not yet mixed evenly; however, this condition is obviously
achieved when the battery is in use.
A Ferrari battery charger or a "stabilised" battery charger is necessary for this procedure.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 3 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Check that the terminals and terminal clamps are thoroughly clean and securely fastened.
Visually inspect the outer casing of the battery for cracks.
Remove the battery ( F2.01).
On models fitted with the special socket for the Ferrari battery charger, this socket can be used to start
the vehicle when the battery is flat. If the vehicle does not have the special socket, an auxiliary battery
and/or a stabilised battery charger must be connected to the terminal poles on the vehicle’s battery,
without using the battery master switch.
If the vehicle is not used for extended periods, remove the battery from the vehicle and recharge at least
once every 3 months.
If you intend to the leave battery connected to the electrical system, to keep certain connected devices
operating (car radio channel memory, alarm system, etc.), recharge at least once a month.
In case of doubt or if any signs of reduced battery performance are noted, check battery charge and/or check
the current absorption of the vehicle electrical system.
CAUTION
The battery must be charged in a well ventilated place away from sources of heat and/or naked flame.
Apply water-repellent lubricant to the electrical system terminal clamps and reconnect the clamps to the
battery terminals.
Tighten the terminal screws securely.
CAUTION
The batteries contain sulphuric acid (corrosive) and, in certain conditions, release explosive gas, especially
during charging; take the precautionary measures prescribed by the instructions and by Law Decree
626/94 – sections 40 and 46, requiring the use of personal protection devices (gloves, goggles etc.) when
working with batteries.
Do not smoke near the battery and keep all sources of flames and sparks away from the battery.
Keep your face out of the area directly above the battery during installation and removal.
To safeguard the electrical components fitted in the vehicle, always use a battery charger with a max.
constant voltage of 14.4 ÷ 15V and a charge current limiting device, and disconnect the battery from
the vehicle electrical system before recharging.
Lead acid batteries do not produce gas during recharging, but the voltage values must be observed to
prevent potential swellings and explosions of the accumulator.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 4 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The maximum time necessary for the battery to start accepting a measurable charge current, in relation to
voltage measured, is as follows.
Ensure the internal temperature of the battery never exceeds 45°C during recharging. If this occurs, stop
recharging for a few hours, then resume and complete the procedure.
At the end of the recharge cycle, battery voltage must be at least 14.4 – 15.0 V.
If this voltage is NOT reached (even if the battery was charged at constant current) indicates a general
deterioration in the state of the battery. In this case, replacing the battery is recommended even if the
vehicle will start.
Prolonged periods with the battery not in use (more than 2 weeks with the battery master switch ON) may
cause faults at the next recharge cycle. The voltage may reach the value of 14.4 – 15.0 V specified
previously, but the current in the battery may drop rapidly and the battery may fail to maintain charge for
the correct period.
Recharging interval
In the event of the vehicle not in use with the battery connected
The battery must be recharged at certain intervals in the event of prolonged periods with the battery not in
use.
Follow the recharge intervals given in the following table, in relation to the current absorption of the electrical
system.
Absorption (mA)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 5 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Interval (days)
< 40 25
40 to 60 20
60 to 80 15
80 to 100 10
In the event of periods with the vehicle not in use and with the battery disconnected or removed for
storage
With the battery removed for storage or with the vehicle kept with the battery disconnected, recharge intervals
must not exceed 3 months.
The battery must be stored or the vehicle must be kept in a dry place with a constant temperature of
approximately 25°C.
Avoid temperatures above 30°C, as self-discharging phenomena increase with increasing ambient
temperature.
Other precautions
Charge the battery with a standard battery charger if battery charge level drops below 75%.
When using battery chargers with automatic disconnection, ensure that the voltage regulator is set to start
charging when battery voltage drops below 12.55 - 12.60 V. In case of doubt, have the voltage
regulator set correctly by the vendor of the battery charger.
If the battery remains in a discharged state for a prolonged period, the battery may be permanently damaged
and may no longer be chargeable. The severity of the damage caused depends on how long and at what
temperature the battery remained in this state.
Battery conditioner
Ferrari vehicles are equipped with a battery conditioner representing the state of the art in battery care.
Using the battery conditioner contributes to prolonging battery life.
The device is stored in a pocket in the car cover bag, which is located in the luggage compartment.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 6 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A quick connector socket is installed in a protected and concealed location in the vehicle for connecting the
device.
The previous image shows the location of the socket for connecting the battery conditioner: under the
dashboard on the passenger side.
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
If the vehicle is not to be used for periods longer than a week, the battery conditioner should be connected to the
vehicle to keep the battery in perfect working order.
Connect the battery conditioner first to the vehicle socket and then to the mains socket: this activates
the “Active” mode, and the battery conditioner may safely be left connected to the vehicle for months.
Place the device outside the vehicle, taking care not to pinch the connector cable and/or damage the seals
when closing the passenger side door.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 7 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
Battery conditioning may be interrupted at any time by simply disconnecting the power cable from the mains
socket.
Always disconnect the mains socket before disconnecting the battery conditioner from the vehicle socket.
Engine start is inhibited as long as the battery conditioner is connected to the vehicle socket (even if the
battery conditioner is disconnected from mains power).
m
.co
es
1 - Error warning light
2 - Active mode indicator light: mode indicator
uid
Indicator light (1) lights continuously: to indicate a malfunction of the vehicle electrical system or battery.
Indicator light (2) lights continuously: battery conditioner in “Active” mode. In this mode, the battery is charged to
the optimum level from a lower level.
-g
Indicator light (3) lights continuously: battery is completely charged and battery conditioner is in “Passive” mode.
In this mode, the device maintains battery charge at an optimum level.
Indicator lights (2) and (3) flashing in alternation:
if the lights flash several times a second, the battery is probably sulphatated;
if the alternating flashing continues for more than 60 minutes, the battery must be replaced;
all
if the lights flash at intervals of a few minutes, the self-discharge percentage of the battery is high and battery
replacement may be necessary.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 8 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
After checking the battery conditioner connections (to the mains and to the vehicle socket) and checking for
mains voltage, if lights (2) and (3) indicating the “Active” or “Passive” mode do not illuminate within a few
seconds of connecting the battery conditioner, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department to have the
vehicle electrical system checked.
Recharging cycle
A - Desulphating
B - Ground
C - Absorption
D - Impulse
Ensure that the cables are not pinched and do not come into contact with hot surfaces or sharp edges.
Never cover the battery conditioner.
Ensure that the mains socket is not exposed to water.
Never recharge a frozen battery.
Never recharge a damaged battery.
Connections to mains electricity must comply with national law concerning high voltages.
Always check the battery conditioner cables before use: there must be no cracks in the cables or the outer
insulation.
Never use a battery conditioner with damaged cables.
Store and use the battery conditioner out of the reach of children; never let children play with the battery
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and recharging battery Page 9 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
conditioner.
Overheating protection
Maintenance
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking the state of the chassis and box elements Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
The vehicle chassis elements, box sections and outer components are made of aluminium: all repairs
and/or replacements of chassis parts or bodywork components must be performed by skilled
personnel using suitable tooling and equipment.
Check that the chassis structures, box elements and outer skins are in perfect condition. Repair if any
deformation or failure is noted.
Check tightness of chassis fittings.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking wheels and tyres Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and at
high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Remove the wheels from the vehicle, then check the state of the wheel rims and tyres.
Check that the tyre pressure matches the value specified
Check the location and fastening of the balancer weights on the inside of the wheel rims.
In case of excessive tyre wear, check the wheel alignment data and perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
Remove the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Check the unions on the pipes leading to the condenser, the dehydrator filter, the evaporator and compressor
.co
for gas leakage.
Check that there is no gas leakage from the system hoses.
Check that there is no refrigerant leakage from the recirculation pump and the evaporator.
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Inspecting the brake system Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check the connection pipes leading to the callipers and to the unions on the rigid lines.
Check that there is no leakage near the brake master cylinder unions or on the electrohydraulic unit.
Check that the unions are properly tightened.
Check that the instrument panel warning lights function correctly.
If any leakage is found, replace the defective unions or pipes.
Fill and bleed the brake system ( D3.10).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Tightening bolts, unions and clamps Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
At the intervals given in the Maintenance Schedule, check the tightness of the major mechanical fittings.
Refer to the tightening torque tables given at the beginning of each section.
Also check that all hydraulic hose fittings and clamps are correctly tightened.
Replace only with the clamp types specified.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A32... 8/5/2011
Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Check that the door hinges and the engine and luggage compartment lid hinges are correctly fastened and
that they open and close without free play or noise.
Check that the door locks and the engine and luggage compartment lid release mechanisms function
correctly.
Check the state of the engine compartment lid release cable and of the fuel filler flap, luggage compartment
lid and engine compartment lid emergency release cables.
Check that the luggage and engine compartment lid gas struts function correctly.
Lubricate all surfaces subject to friction with waterproof lithium grease.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Proper and regular treatment (at least once a year) will preserve the natural qualities and softness of Ferrari
leather trim.
For this precise purpose, a range of specific leather care products (Cleaner and Cream), developed and
tested by Ferrari, is also available. These products may be ordered through the Ferrari Spare Parts
Department, either individually or as part of the "Care Kit", which includes a complete set of car cleaning
products.
For the instructions on how to use the products contained in the "Care Kit", see the "User's Manual,
Carrozzeria Scaglietti Programme" and the instructions included with the Kit.
Never use acidic detergents, turpentine, liquid stain removers, petrol, solvents or domestic cleaning products
to clean leather as these will damage the natural material.
Alcantara® is the registered trade mark of a new generation material produced exclusively by Alcantara S.p.A.
Both elegant and practical, Alcantara® combines softness, sophistication, rich colours and outstanding
resilience with remarkably easy maintenance.
The material is ideally suited to innovative and exclusive applications in interior decor, automotive interiors,
fashion clothing and fashion accessories.
Regular care
Avoid rubbing with too much force and do not use equipment with vapour.
Daily cleaning
Simply dust Alcantara® with a soft brush or dry cloth, or clean with a vacuum cleaner.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Weekly cleaning
Avoid the use of rags/blotting paper because they could leave ink on the material.
m
After dusting Alcantara®, wipe with a slightly moistened white cotton cloth.
Yearly cleaning
.co
With removable upholstery, machine wash using the following procedure (general guidelines for washing).
With non-removable upholstery, use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.
If no specific products are available, dust the material thoroughly.
Be very careful not to wet Alcantara® in depth.
es
Moisten a soft cloth or sponge with water, squeeze out thoroughly and wipe all surfaces in Alcantara®.
Wipe again with a cloth moistened with clean water and leave to dry completely (overnight).
Once dry, brush delicately with a soft bristled brush to restore the nap.
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
In case of dry-cleaning do not use trichloroethylene and avoid direct contact with equipment that uses
steam.
With removable upholstery, Alcantara® may be safely machine washed at approximately 30°C, using a
neutral detergent.
If Velcro is applied to the upholstery hems, protect the Velcro with counter-velcro before washing to prevent
damage to the upholstery.
After washing, allow the upholstery to air-dry and brush gently with a soft-bristled brush.
The bottom of the iron must be at a temperature lower than 110°C.
If necessary, Alcantara® may be ironed, placing a white cloth between the iron and the material.
Spray extraction cleaning machines may only be used at low temperatures.
For non-removable upholstery, follow the procedure give for yearly cleaning.
With localised stains, if no specific products for cleaning Alcantara® are available, immediately wipe off
(within 30 minutes) and minimise the stain, working from the edge of the stain toward the middle to stop
it from spreading.
Before wiping off the stain, remove the spilt substance from the upholstery: use a spoon or plastic spatula for
dense substances (yoghurt, jam etc.), use unprinted absorbent paper or a sponge with liquids.
Do not pour the product being used for cleaning directly on Alcantara®.
Use a moistened and thoroughly squeezed white cloth or sponge to remove stains.
When using a sponge, rinse in clean water and squeeze thoroughly between applications.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara Page 4 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Water-soluble stains
Non-water-soluble stains
Chewing gum and wax: fill a plastic bag with ice; when the substance has hardened, break it off in pieces,
then treat with ethyl alcohol.
Stubborn stains
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Checking radiators for fouling Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Detritus from the road may enter the vehicle front air intake and foul the radiators; over time, this may
compromise the functionality of the cooling systems so that they are no longer capable of providing sufficient
cooling.
It is therefore VITAL that the radiator cores are checked for fouling at each scheduled service and cleaned, if
necessary, using the following procedure.
Remove the front bumper ONLY in the event of very heavy fouling.
ONLY in the event of very stubborn dirt, which may be possible with particularly high mileage vehicles,
remove the radiator assembly and remove the dirt by blowing air from the rear of the radiators.
Periodically check the condition of the radiator core. Clean the radiator fins, removing any leaves, insects or
other matter that could obstruct air flow and lead to overheating of the fluid. Straighten any bending
present while being careful not to cause breakage of the radiator core.
Replace the radiator if it proves to be in poor condition.
Periodically check the state of the pipe couplings.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (if applicable) Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
DO NOT lean on the vehicle, especially if wearing garments with buttons, belts, rings, necklaces etc., as
you may cause irreparable damage to the bodywork.
For information on the correct products to be used, contact the Ferrari Service Network.
Proper care by the owner is essential for keeping vehicles with matt paintwork (optional) in pristine condition.
Wash the vehicle exclusively with Steam cleaner, and rinse with demineralised water only.
The vehicle must only be dried with an automatic blower or with compressed air. The vehicle may ONLY be
hand dried using a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened with
demineralised water and using Glass cleaning solution in areas with remaining limescale residue. Keep
the cloth in a specific clean container.
To remove grease stains, use a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened in
R107/S solvent (heptane). Use a new cloth only, or a cloth that has never been used with demineralised
water or Glass cleaning solution.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the bodywork is still hot.
Never apply adhesive stickers to the bodywork.
Cracks or exposed areas of underlying bodywork caused by stones, scratches, parking damage etc. must be
repaired immediately by the Ferrari Service Network.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Service counter reset Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
Switch on the DEIS tester.
Click the DEIS button.
.co
es
uid
Click "Diagnostics"
Select "SET SERVICE"
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A33... 8/5/2011
Technical specifications Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Engine specifications
Type F136FB
Number of cylinders 90° V8
Cylinder bore 3.7 in.
Piston stroke 3.2 in.
Total displacement 4499 cm³
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1
Max. engine speed 9200 rpm
(at rev limiter)
Maximum power (Dir. 558 hp
1999/99/EC)
Corresponding rpm 9000 rpm
Maximum torque (Dir. 398.23 ft. lb.
1999/99/EC)
Corresponding rpm 6000 rpm
Specific tooling and equipment All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
Tensiometer (95978151)
Seem DIAPAZ.
m
.co
Engine retainer bracket for gearbox removal
95978254 (AV 8254)
removing the gearbox.
es
uid
Print Exit
Print Exit
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY RETAINERS
INSTALLED.
m
.co Remove the cover (92).
es
uid
pipe.
There are two "double-lock" safety clips fitted onto
the union.
To disconnect the "double-lock" quick connector,
using due caution and by pressing on both sides,
all
push the safety clip out of its seat until you hear
the "unclick".
The difference between the safety clip "clicked"
and "unclicked" position is only a few
millimetres.
m
.co FROM Ass.ly No. 90802
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and undo the
indicated nut fastening the cable (45).
Detach the clamps retaining the cable (45) to the
chassis.
Pull out the right hand injection cable (22) and place
on top of the intake manifold.
m
.co Pull out the left hand injection cable (28) and place
on top of the intake manifold.
es
uid
m
Removing the engine-gearbox assembly
.co
The following procedure is only possible with the rear removable subframe already removed from the vehicle.
es
Remove the rear subframe ( E2.02).
Remove the air flow meter ( F3.07).
Remove both.
Move the oil pipes of both systems aside carefully, taking care not to twist or damage them, so that they do
not hinder the removal of the gearbox.
m
.co Unscrew the indicated screws and remove the
lower gearbox mounting cross-member (9).
es
uid
Print Exit
m
Tightening torque
.co
Fastening engine strut - engine mounting bush Screw
Screw
Nm
15 Nm
103 Nm
Class
B
A
es
Fastening engine mounting bush - chassis Screw 50 Nm B
Fastening heat shield - engine mounting bush Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening ground cable - engine Screw 18 Nm B
Fastening removable subframe to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening heat shield - removable subframe Screw 9 Nm B
uid
Fit and fasten the heat shields (37) over the engine
mounting bushes on both sides, tightening the
screws indicated.
m
.co Tighten the screw indicated on the ground cable
(38) onto the engine and secure the cable to the
indicated fastener clamp on the starter motor
shield.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 18 Nm B
uid
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and tighten the
indicated nut fastening the cable (45).
m
.co UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801
Fit and fasten the bracket (20) onto the pipe retainer
pillory block, tightening the screws indicated.
all
m
and the pipes are secured correctly.
The difference between the safety clip "unclicked"
and "clicked" position is only a few millimetres.
m
millimetres, ensuring that the bar tension is
uniform and that the assembly itself lifts evenly.
Lift the engine-gearbox assembly and set down in
the relevant seats on the rear subframe, taking
care to avoid collisions with any other
.co
es components.
Fit and fasten the heat shields (37) over the engine
mounting bushes on both sides, tightening the
screws indicated.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 60 Nm A
.co Fasten the drain pipe (23) inside the rubber lined
brackets tightening the indicated screws.
es
uid
Print Exit
m
Remove the ignition coils ( F3.02).
In preparation
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Engine overhaul - Inspections All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
In preparation
In preparation
Engine overhaul - Rebuild All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
In preparation
m
.co
Connect the connectors (1).
es
uid
Print Exit
A - Fuel tanks
B - Fuel pumps
C - High pressure pumps
D - Fuel rail
E - Low pressure pipes
F - High pressure pipes
G - Fuel level sensor
H - Fuel pump filters
Fuel tank All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 12
Print Exit
m
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Drain the fuel system ( B3.06).
Remove the rear subframe ( E2.02).
.co
Remove the secondary air pump ( F3.12).
Remove the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).
Remove the lower left hand lateral passenger compartment trim panel.
m
.co
Fasten the cap (2) in the relative housing.
es Fasten the cable grommet (1) on the cap (2).
uid
m
.co Fit the lower heat shield (2).
Tighten the indicated fasteners.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 9 Nm B
Nut 5 Nm B
uid
Print Exit
CAUTION
FUEL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
TO PREVENT FIRE RISKS AND FUEL LEAKAGE, WORK ONLY ON A COLD ENGINE WITH AN EMPTY
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after the
operations described.
Protect the engine components adequately to allow access to the interior of the fuel tanks and work
without damaging the engine.
The fuel pump filters are fitted on the respective fuel tanks, at the front of the engine compartment.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand fuel pump. Where applicable, differences in the procedure
for the right hand fuel pump are given.
Right-hand side
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind
that the line may be pressurised. Proceed
therefore with caution and keep away any type of
flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the
operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent
residual fuel from leaking.
Disconnect the fuel pipe (5) from the fuel pump filter.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802, detach the clip indicated
by the red arrow.
Fit the tool (AV 8175) in the relative seat on the fuel
pump filter ring nut (6).
Turn the fuel pump filter ring nut (6)
counterclockwise to bring the lock pin (shown in
the box in the photo) into the position indicated.
Remove the tool and remove the fuel pump filter
ring nut (6).
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind
that the line may be pressurised. Proceed
therefore with caution and keep away any type of
flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the
operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent
residual fuel from leaking.
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand fuel pump. Where applicable, differences in the procedure
Fuel pump assembly All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 9
Before refitting, thoroughly clean all the parts removed and dry with compressed air.
m
.co Connect the connectors (9) on the fuel pump filter
(A).
es
uid
-g
Connect the unions (7) and (8) and fit the fuel pump
filter (A) in the relative housing.
all
Fuel pump assembly All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 9
Fit the safety clip (10) into its seat on the fuel pump
filter ring nut, ensuring that it is securely
fastened.
Fuel pump assembly All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 9
Connect the fuel pipe (5) onto the fuel pump filter.
Fasten the ground cable (4), fitting the lock washer
and tightening the indicated screw.
Connect the connector (3).
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802, fasten the clip indicated
by the red arrow.
Right-hand side
CAUTION
FUEL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
TO PREVENT FIRE RISKS AND FUEL LEAKAGE, WORK ONLY ON A COLD ENGINE WITH AN EMPTY
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after the
operations described.
Protect the engine components adequately to allow access to the interior of the fuel tanks and work
without damaging the engine.
ALWAYS REPLACE the ring nut and relative O-ring whenever the fuel pump is removed.
There are two fuel pumps, installed inside the fuel tanks at the front of the engine compartment.
The following procedure is for the replacement of the left hand fuel pump which, unlike the right hand pump, also
incorporates the fuel level sensor.
m
.co
Refit the fuel pump filter ( B3.03).
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Connect the DEIS diagnostic tester to the diagnostic socket ( F2.10).
Perform the "Fuel tank tightness test" cycle.
es
uid
-g
all
Fuel level sensor All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
CAUTION
FUEL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
TO PREVENT FIRE RISKS AND FUEL LEAKAGE, WORK ONLY ON A COLD ENGINE WITH AN EMPTY
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after the
operations described.
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed, ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW SENSOR, fitting a new O-
ring.
The fuel level sensor is mounted on the left hand fuel tank and is accessible from the passenger compartment.
Fit the tool (AV 8176) in the relative seat on the fuel
level sensor (A).
Turn the fuel level sensor (A) counterclockwise to
bring the retainer clips (shown in the box in the
photo) into the position indicated.
Remove the fuel level sensor (A) from its seat and
replace.
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed,
ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW
SENSOR, fitting a new O-ring.
Fit the tool (AV 8176) in the relative seat on the fuel
level sensor (A).
Turn the fuel level sensor (A) clockwise to bring the
retainer clips (shown in the box in the photo) into
the position indicated.
Fit and fasten the cap (1) onto the fuel level sensor
seat.
Pull the rubber cable grommet (2) outwards, then fit
correctly on the cap (1).
Print Exit
m
.co
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
the "unclick".
The difference between the safety clip "clicked"
and "unclicked" position is only a few
millimetres.
the unions.
To disconnect the "double-lock" quick connector,
using due caution and by pressing on both sides,
push the safety clip out of its seat until you hear
the "unclick".
The difference between the safety clip "clicked"
and "unclicked" position is only a few
millimetres.
Print Exit
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
This procedure requires the use of an aspirator pump compliant with EEC standards.
Connect a suitable pipe at least 2.5 metres in length, with a maximum diameter of 10 mm, to the aspirator
pump.
Select the funnel (A) from the vehicle tool kit and
insert in the relative seat in the filler neck.
The funnel releases the capless automatic filler
neck closure system.
CAUTION
Collect the fuel in a suitable container.
Feed the pipe into the filler neck until it reaches the right hand fuel tank, then aspirate all the fuel out of the
tank.
The two tanks are connected by a pipe at the bottom, so the fuel level will drop in both tanks simultaneously.
Check the quantity of fuel remaining in the tanks from the instrument panel. If necessary, repeat the previous
procedure to aspirate as much of the fuel as possible out of the tanks.
Air intake system layout All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A - Air ducts
B - Air filter box
C - Air flow meters
D - Throttle bodies
E - Intake manifold
Air ducts All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
m
The procedure for removing the right hand duct is identical.
.co Loosen the screw collar (1) fastening the duct (A) to
the hose union (B).
Disconnect the hose union (B) from the duct (A).
Undo the screw (2) fastening the duct (A).
es
uid
Print Exit
Prise out and move the air filter box cover (A) out of
its seat.
Air filter box All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 6
Remove the air filter (B) from the relevant seat and
replace.
Fit the new air filter (B) in the relevant seat.
Fit the air filter box cover (A) in its relevant seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the air filter
box cover (A) to the air filter box.
m
.co
Working with due caution, remove the air filter box from the relevant seat.
Working with due caution, fit the air filter box in the relative seat.
-g
Fit the air filter box cover (B) in the relative seat,
refitting the O-rings and connecting the cover to
the air flow meters (A).
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the air filter
box cover (B).
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the air flow
meters (A) to the air filter box cover (B).
Print Exit
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
m
.co Right-hand side
Right-hand side
-g
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
m
.co Left-hand side
es
Keeping the intake manifold tilted, remove the
indicated clip fastening the power steering fluid
pipes (24).
uid
-g
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
With the assistance of another worker, lift the intake manifold off the engine.
Cover the intake duct orifices to prevent foreign bodies from entering.
Close off the intake ports in the cylinder heads to prevent foreign objects from entering the ducts.
With the assistance of another worker, fit the intake manifold in the relative seat on the engine.
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
m
.co Close the indicated clamp fastening the pipes to the
intake manifold.
es
uid
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
Right-hand side
m
.co
Connect the pneumatic actuator system pipes (2)
es and fasten with a new clamp as indicated.
uid
Print Exit
Print Exit
The oil pump is mounted on the lower right hand side of the engine.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening engine oil recovery and pick-up pipe Screw 10 Nm B
.co
Oil pump - crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening oil pump bush retainer bracket Screw 10 Nm B
Before refitting the oil pump, replace all the gaskets as follows.
Fasten the flange (8) onto the oil pump (A), fitting
the retainer fork (9) and tightening the screw
indicated.
If the hexagonal bar was removed, during reassembly, ensure that the white paint marking on the bar itself is
turned towards the timing side.
Fit the pipe (2) in the relative seat on the oil pump
(A).
Fit the fork (1) retaining the pipe (2) in its relative
seat and fasten the assembly by tightening the
indicated screw.
Print Exit
m
Remove the air flow meter ( F3.07).
.co
es
Remove both air flow meters.
Disconnect the pipe (3) from the engine oil tank (A).
Disconnect the pipes (6) and (7) from the right hand
intake manifold, removing the relative clamps
and opening the indicated clamp.
Engine oil tank All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 8
Remove the engine oil tank from the engine compartment, lifting out from above.
Fit the engine oil tank (A) in the relative seat on the
gearbox from above and fasten at the rear by
tightening the screws indicated.
m
.co Tighten the front left hand screw fastening the
engine oil tank (A) to the gearbox.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 10 Nm B
uid
Fit the pipe (11) in the relative seat on the oil pump
(13).
Fit the fork (12) retaining the pipe (11) in its relative
seat and fasten the assembly by tightening the
indicated screw.
Connect the pipes (6) and (7) onto the right hand
intake manifold, fitting new clamps and closing
the indicated clamp onto the pipe.
Engine oil tank All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 8
Connect the pipes (2) and (3) to the engine oil tank
(A), fitting a new clamp.
Print Exit
The following photos show the engine removed from the vehicle to illustrate the procedure more clearly.
However, the following procedure is also possible with the engine still installed in the vehicle.
m
.co
Remove the adhesive gasket (10) from the heat
es exchanger (A) and replace.
uid
Fit and fasten the water vent pipe (8), tightening the
indicated union.
Lay the engine services cable (7) as originally fitted
on the heat exchanger.
Print Exit
Print Exit
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
m
Tightening torque
Magnetic oil drain plugs
.co M22x1.5 plug
Nm
60 Nm
Class
B
Clean the oil drain plugs (1) and (2) thoroughly with
a suitable degreaser that does not leave residue.
es
Always replace the seals with new seals.
Tighten the plugs (1) onto the crankcase.
uid
Fully tighten the cap (2) onto the engine oil tank.
-g
Unscrew the engine oil filler cap (B) and remove it.
all
Draining and filling the engine lubrication
All manuals system
and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 3
Check that there are no oil leaks from the draining plugs and the filter cartridge.
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Check the engine oil level ( A3.01).
Engine cooling system layout All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A - Expansion tank
B - Water pump
C - Radiators
Expansion tank All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
Drain the coolant from the tank by aspirating it from the filler neck.
Print Exit
m
Drain the engine lubrication system ( A3.01).
Drain the cooling system ( B6.07).
Remove the from timing cover ( B2.03).
.co
Undo the two screws indicated and remove the
water pump (A) from its seat in the front timing
cover.
es
uid
Print Exit
Loosen the clamp (1) and detach the pipe (2) from the
pressure switch/thermostat (A).
Undo the screws indicated, remove the pressure
switch/thermostat (A) and replace.
Print Exit
m
.co
Supporting the weight of the water radiator (D),
undo the indicated rear screw fastening the
water radiator (D) and retrieve the relative
washer and mounting.
es
uid
m
.co Remove the plug from the water radiator (D).
Connect the pipe union (C) to the water radiator (D).
Tighten the clamp (3) fastening the pipe union (C)
to the water radiator (D).
es
uid
Fit the upper radiator air duct (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the upper
radiator air duct (B).
Fit the front brake air duct (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the front
brake air duct (A).
Fit the upper radiator air duct (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the upper
radiator air duct (B).
Fit the front brake air duct (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the front
brake air duct (A).
Print Exit
m
Only remove the water radiator on which the relative electric fan is mounted.
.co
es Remove the electric fan (A) from the relative seat.
uid
Print Exit
CAUTION
ALWAYS WORK WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures; take the necessary precautions
to prevent burns.
CAUTION
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures and pressure.
ALWAYS WORK WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
m
06) Check that heater circuit is off.
.co
07) Start engine at idle speed and wait for 5 minutes.
es
08) Keep engine running at idle speed, check level and, if necessary, top up until MAX level.
09) Take and keep engine at 2000 rpm for 30 seconds.
10) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 30 seconds.
11) Take and keep engine at 2000 rpm for 30 seconds.
12) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 30 seconds.
uid
Print Exit
A - Manifolds
B - Catalytic converters
C - Silencers
D - Silencer joint
Exhaust manifold All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
The following process is for removing the left hand exhaust manifold.
The differences in the procedure for removing the right hand exhaust manifold will be indicated in the
instructions.
m
.co
Remove the template (AV 8257) from the exhaust manifold.
Check that the gasket mating surfaces on the head and the manifold are perfectly flat; if necessary, remove
any encrustation or gasket residue.
Preferably replace the gasket each time it is removed.
Lubricate the head stud bolts with copper based grease COPASLIP for high temperatures.
Fit the secondary air pipe (3) in the relative seat and
fasten to the valve/mounting bracket by
tightening the two screws indicated.
Working from the wheel bay, fit the heat shield (4).
Hand tighten the indicated screw.
If necessary, bend the heat shield (4) back into the
original shape.
m
.co Applicable for right hand exhaust manifold ONLY
relative nut.
all
Exhaust manifold All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 9 of 9
Applicable for left hand exhaust manifold only. Refit the compressor ( F5.03).
Adjust the exhaust system ( B7.04).
Refit the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Catalytic converter All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
The following procedure is for removing the left hand catalytic converter.
The procedure for removing the right hand catalytic converter is identical.
m
.co
Right hand catalytic converter
Print Exit
B7.04 Silencers
m
.co
Support the weight of the silencer adequately.
Fit the left hand silencer (B) in the relative seat and
connect to the left hand catalytic converter (C).
Partially tighten the clamp (3) fastening the left hand
silencer (B) to the left hand catalytic converter
(C), tightening the relative nut.
Silencers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 7 of 20
m
.co Partially tighten the indicated nut fastening the
lateral mounting bushing for the left hand
silencer.
es
uid
silencers (B).
Partially tighten the clamps (2) fastening the central
exhaust pipe (A) to the silencers (B), tightening
the relative nuts indicated.
Silencers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 20
The exhaust system must be adjusted each time a component of the exhaust system is removed and
reinstalled.
NEVER reuse exhaust system clamps that have been subjected to operating temperature. Replace with
new components.
Removal and refitting is only permitted with new clamps for adjustment purposes during initial installation.
m
.co Loosen the indicated clamps.
es
uid
m
.co Tighten the nuts indicated.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 13 Nm B
uid
Working from the wheel bay, fit the heat shield (10).
Hand tighten the indicated screw.
If necessary, bend the heat shield (10) back into the
original shape.
Print Exit
Gear ratios
General
New dual clutch gearbox with 7 forward speeds + reverse and F1 shift paddles, chosen to offer the driving
pleasure of a sequential gearbox together with the comfort of an automatic gearbox.
Electrohydraulic actuation.
Triple cone synchronisers on all gear ratios to ensure the sporty performance typical of a sequential gearbox.
The system has two different wet clutches, each one of which mated to a different primary shaft. One clutch
Technical specifications All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 2
drives the even gears, the other drives the odd gears.
While one primary shaft transmits torque to 1st gear, 2nd gear is already engaged on the other primary shaft.
Gear shifting is achieved by opening one clutch while simultaneously closing the other. The results of this are
shift times close to zero (sportiness), seamless torque delivery (performance) and shifts as smooth as an
automatic transmission (comfort).
Control panel on centre console for selecting reverse gear, Automatic gearbox mode and the Launch Control
function.
Clutch
m
Two wet multi-plate clutches with integrated centrifugal force actuation.
Mounting for the dual clutch in the clutch housing.
Hydraulically actuated clutch.
.co
Gear shift system
Print Exit
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
.co
es
uid
Print Exit
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY RETAINERS
INSTALLED.
m
Disconnect the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes (4)
from the gearbox and plug immediately.
.co
Undo the screws indicated fastening the retainers
on the pillory blocks holding the clutch hydraulic
system oil pipes (4) and the gear oil pipes (6).
Clean the area surrounding the gear oil pipe
fastener point thoroughly with a suitable
degreaser that does not leave residue.
Place a container for collecting the gear oil under
the pipes.
es
Undo the screw indicated fastening the fork (5) on
the gear oil pipes.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a
container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of
used oil in the environment.
uid
Move the oil pipes of both systems aside carefully, taking care not to twist or damage them, so that they do
not hinder the removal of the gearbox.
-g
gearbox.
Removing the complete DCT gearbox
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 13
Ensure that the lower and upper parts of the pin are
correctly fastened to the gearbox and trolley
(AS 107572) respectively, then tighten the nut
(19).
Repeat this procedure for all the adjuster pins.
m
.co Unscrew the indicated screws and remove the
lower gearbox mounting cross-member (9).
es
Also recover the support spacer (element 05) of tool
(AS 107572).
uid
-g
Print Exit
m
.co Supporting the weight of the gearbox adequately
with the lift trolley (AS 107565) and the trolley
(AS 107572), position the complete gearbox (A)
under the engine compartment, aligned with the
engine stud bolts.
es
Loosen the two trolley platform locking handles
(AS 107565) and move the trolley (AS 107572)
to fit the gearbox (A) onto the engine stud bolts.
uid
Fit and tighten the four lower nuts (14) fastening the
complete gearbox (A) to the engine (B).
Remove all the lifting tools (AS 107572) and (AS 107565).
Refitting the complete DCT gearbox
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 11
m
Screw 88 Nm A
Screw 24 Nm A
.co Loosen the nut (C), then unscrew the pin (D) by a
few turns.
Supporting the weight of the tool (AV 8254), undo
the two screws indicated then remove the tool
from under the vehicle.
es
uid
Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Lower the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Refit the rear diffuser ( E3.12).
Gear oil radiator All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
m
E3.04).
.co
The gear oil radiator is located on the rear right-hand side of the vehicle, in front of the rear bumper.
spillage.
Mark the position of the unions (2) on the radiator to
avoid inverting them during the reassembly
operations.
Undo the unions (2) on the gear oil radiator (A).
Place immediately suitable plugs on radiator and
pipe inlets.
Clean any spilt fluid.
Gear oil radiator All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 4
Fit the gear oil radiator (A) in the relative seat in the
vehicle and fasten by tightening the indicated
nuts.
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Operation to be carried out in the event of oil spillage.
Print Exit
C2.05 Draining and filling with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
The gear oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
m
.co
Undo the threaded inspection/filler plug (3) located
es on the rear surface of the transmission.
uid
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
Hydraulic clutch oil system layout
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
Print Exit
The clutch hydraulic system oil radiator is located on the rear left-hand side of the vehicle, in front of the rear
bumper.
m
Union 35 Nm B
.co
Fit and fasten the duct (1) by tightening the
indicated fasteners.
The internal nut is in common with the radiator
fastening to the chassis.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
uid
Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Operation to be carried out in the event of oil spillage.
Print Exit
C3.03 Draining and filling with Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil
Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plug.
Axle shafts All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
m
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand axle shaft.
The procedure for removing the left hand axle shaft is similar.
.co
Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).
Remove the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
Undo the six screws (3) fastening the axle shaft (A)
to the differential flange, recovering the three
shims (4).
all
Axle shafts All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 6
Tilt the hub carrier outward to detach the axle shaft from the differential flange.
If necessary, cut the cable retainer clamps to slacken any tension preventing the hub carrier from tilting.
Use a suitable punch and mallet to extract the axle shaft from the hub carrier bearing, then remove the axle
shaft from the vehicle.
When refitting the same axle shaft, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH
RETAINING COMPOUND.
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from the
hub carrier bearing.
Check that the surface of the differential flange is completely clean.
Axle shafts All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 6
Use a punch and mallet to caulk (1) the ring nut (2).
m
.co
Attach the end (8) of the left hand EPB Bowden
cable (9) to the EPB linkage bracket.
Refit the clip (7) in the relative seat on the EPB
linkage bracket.
es
uid
Print Exit
C4.02 Flywheel
Print Exit
Brake system
VDC: vehicle dynamics control through the brake system and engine torque;
F1-Trac: traction control, which functions by modulating engine torque in relation to maximum road grip.
CST also consists of a number of secondary systems, such as ABS, EBD etc., which are active at all times.
F1-Trac is quicker and more precise than a conventional traction control system and delays and minimises the
engine torque corrections necessary to maintain the desired trajectory.
The system is self-adaptive and calculates the maximum grip available by constantly monitoring the relative
speeds of the wheels.
F1-Trac correlates real data against a vehicle dynamics model stored in the control system and optimises the
behaviour of the vehicle by controlling engine torque delivery.
F1-Trac is not active with the Manettino turned to "CST off".
Suspension
New double-wishbone front suspension, including a hollow torsion bar to reduce roll, leading to a subsequent
increase in driving comfort.
New rear Multilink suspension. The Multilink layout means that the suspension has greater flexibility lengthwise
(for greater comfort) while maintaining the same transversal rigidity values as a conventional layout (the
same handling).
Technical specifications All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 3
The Multilink suspension layout offers a greater capacity to absorb bumps together with lower levels of noise
and vibration, optimum transversal rigidity and comfort.
Magnetorheological shock absorbers, already available on 599 GTB Fiorano and California.
Front
Tyre size
Rear
Tyre size
Front Rear
Pirelli P Zero 30.46 psi 29 psi
Bridgestone Potenza 33.36 psi 33.36 psi
Michelin Pilot Sport 30.46 psi 29 psi
Technical specifications All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 3
Front Rear
Bridgestone Potenza 33.36 psi 36.26 psi
(Run Flat)
Pirelli Winter 30.46 psi 29 psi
Sottozero
Vredestein (Spare 60.92 psi 60.92 psi
wheel)
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Specific tooling and equipment All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
.co
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
es
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and at
high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and at
high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Complete wheel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 3
Check the state of wear of the tyre and the state of the wheel rim.
When replacing a tyre or rim, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced.
Check that the mating surfaces on the rim and brake disc are perfectly clean.
Replace any stud bolts with damage to the thread or cone.
Clean the stud bolts thoroughly before refitting.
Never lubricate the contact surfaces between the stud bolt and rim and between the rim and the brake disc.
Do not clean the wheel cones with solvents or aggressive products as they may remove the anti-seizing
coating.
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and at
high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Complete wheel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 3
Print Exit
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions
and at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
CAUTION
Pressure increases with increasing tyre temperature. Never reduce the tyre pressure if measured when the
tyres are hot.
Tyre overheating due to underinflation may seriously compromise handling and tyre integrity.
Do not inflate the tyres to a pressure other than the specified value, as this would render the tyre pressure
monitoring system useless.
After replacing one or more tyres, always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system by pressing the button
on the passenger compartment dome light panel.
Check the inflation pressure: pressure must be measured with cold tyres and must match the values specified.
CAUTION
Always inspect any tyre damage very carefully to assess severity: damage may greatly reduce tyre life and
cause accidents.
Check the tyres to ensure that there are no signs of damage such as abrasion, cuts, cracks, bubbles etc.
Violent knocks against kerbs, holes or other obstacles and driving on poor road surfaces for extended periods
may cause tyre damage. This damage may not always be visible. Any foreign objects penetrating the tyre
in these conditions may cause structural damage that is only identifiable after removing the tyre from the
wheel.
CAUTION
If the same tyres have been fitted on the vehicle for over 3 years, check frequently and carefully for signs of
deterioration.
Do not monitor the pressure of a damaged tyre.
Tyres will deteriorate even if the vehicle is used rarely or kept stationary. Cracks in the rubber on the tread
and sidewalls, at times accompanied by blisters, are an indication of tyre deterioration.
Tyres and rims All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 11
CAUTION
Never fit a tyre with tread depth under the specified limit, even if only in a single localised area.
Check the tread depth: the minimum permissible value is 1.7 mm. This depth is identified by the tyre wear
indicators.
Check the wear over the entire tread; in the event of uneven tread wear, perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing.
Note that in order to mount conventional tyres on a vehicle that has been fitted with Run Flat tyres, the
instrument panel must be reprogrammed as the TFT display will display a warning message.
Replace any tyres that have been punctured and/or been inflated with the tyre inflation bottle included with
vehicle toolkit. For safety reasons, we do not recommend attempting to repair punctured tyres.
Tyre grades
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety requirements, in addition to these grades.
DOT rating
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are “AA”, “A”, “B” and “C”. Those grades represent the tyre's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked "C" has poor traction performance.
The traction rating given to a tyre is based on straight line braking tests and does not take other factors
such as acceleration, steering angle, aquaplaning or traction peaks into account.
Tyres and rims All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 11
Temperature
The temperature grades are "A" (the highest), "B", and "C", representing the tyre's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade "C" corresponds to a
minimum level of resistance to which all tyres for cars carrying passengers must comply, according to what is
established by the Federal Standard no. 109 on vehicle safety (Federal Motor Safety Standard). Grades “B”
and “A”, measured for tyres on a laboratory test wheel, indicate higher performance levels than those
required by law.
The temperature rating is with reference to a correctly inflated, correctly loaded tyre. Excessive speed,
insufficient inflation, overloading or combinations thereof may cause heat production and possible tyre
m
failure.
.co
The tyre pressure monitoring sensor is installed on the wheel rims, near the inflation valve.
es
uid
-g
all
Removing the tyre without using the correct tools and taking the necessary precautions may damage the
sensor.
Tyres and rims All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 11
To avoid this problem, we are showing the entire procedure for removal and refitting of the tyres from the wheel
rim, using a CORGHI tool, model Artiglio A2019 RC (shown in the photo) or Artiglio A2020 TI,
recommended by Ferrari.
To prevent damage to the wheel rim, all parts of the tool that may come into contact with the rim are rubber
coated.
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a maximum
of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather and humidity
and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will verify whether old
tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3 years must be inspected
by an authorised Ferrari Service Centre.
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions
and at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and compromise
its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
The photos shown here were taken using a rim from the 575M Maranello.
Tyres and rims All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 11
To more clearly identify the correct mounting positions for the tools relative to the wheel, the vertical column of
the tyre demounting machine is used as the starting point (12 o'clock).
Position the tyre bead on the tool (4) using the lever
(5).
Remove the lever.
Tyres and rims All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 7 of 11
Remove the rim from the machine and put carefully in a safe place.
If the tyre is not to be refitted immediately, refit the valve core and cap.
When carrying out regular maintenance or replacing tyres, check the state of the wheel rims.
Visually inspect the external and internal wheel rim surfaces; if cracks or deep gouges are noted, replace the
wheel.
In the case of scratching, minor dents or superficial scuffs, repaint the affected area or, if necessary, the
entire rim. Use the standard procedure for repainting an alloy wheel, applying a coat of silver based paint
then, once the coat had dried to a matte finish, applying a layer of clear coat. Dry the wheel in the oven to
polymerise the layers of paint applied.
Cover the valve mounting and the hub badge when repainting, as the additional thickness of the paint may
impede correct assembly and compromise the effectiveness of the corrosion treatment applied.
Take particular care around the mating surface with the brake disc; this area is only coated with a single layer
of cataphoresis film.
m
This treatment has a limited lifespan as the film is gradually eroded by fretting between the surfaces. This
area cannot be repainted and a rim with a deteriorated film must be replaced.
Before refitting, always check that the mating surfaces between the wheel and the brake disc are perfectly
clean.
.co
Using inappropriate tools for removing and refitting the tyre may damage the wheel rim and compromise
the protective layer.
Balance the wheel without the tyre but with the pressure sensor and valve installed: if, after removing the
balancer weights, the values for static balance exceed 36 (including vertical bouncing and wobble), the rim
must be replaced.
es
Refitting the tyre
uid
-g
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a maximum
of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather and humidity
and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will verify whether old
tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3 years must be inspected
all
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions
and at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and compromise
its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
Wheel balancing
Only use self-adhesive counterweights. In addition to damaging the wheel rim, other types of
counterweights can interfere with parts of the suspension or detach while driving.
Do not touch the adhesive surface of the counterweight before applying to the rim and never reuse
counterweights or use weights with no protective paper, as these may detach while driving.
After replacing a tyre, wheel rim, or both, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced using a
balancing machine and suitable counterweights.
Manufacturers identify the heaviest part of the wheel rim and the tyre with a reference mark. When mounting the
tyre onto the rim, always set these reference marks opposite each other to minimise the amount of
counterweights necessary for balancing.
Print Exit
A - Sensors
B - Trigger
C - Antenna
D - Electronic control unit
The system must be calibrated from the relative menu option on the left hand TFT display after replacing
or inflating any of the tyres.
The TPMS system may be calibrated from the specific Menu option on the left hand TFT display.
The sensors fixed to the interior of the wheel rims, next to the inflation valve, detect the pressure and
temperature of the tyres.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 20
These sensors transmit a signal received by the triggers fixed to the bodyshell behind the gravel guard, which
are in turn connected to the ECU.
The ECU processes the data received from the triggers and transmits the processed data to the instrument
panel.
The data transmitted to ECU activates the respective indications on the left hand TFT display.
m
.co
es
TYRES screen: use the relative controls on the left hand TFT display to access the informative screen
displaying the pressure and temperature values for each tyre.
With any currently active screen, when the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit
indicating that the pressure of one or more tyres is below the warning threshold, but the system cannot
recognise which wheel is generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Check
tyre pressure” without the vehicle symbol.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 20
With any currently active screen, when the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit
indicating that the pressure of a tyre is below the warning threshold, the TFT display displays the specific
message “Check tyre pressure” together with the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
The background of the box indicating the pressure and relative unit of measurement for the faulty tyre turns
amber.
With any currently active screen, when the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit
indicating that the pressure of more than one tyre is below the warning threshold, the TFT display displays
the specific message “Check tyre pressure” together with the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
The background of the box indicating the pressure and relative unit of measurement for the faulty tyre turns
amber.
The display cycle is 20 seconds, after which time the specific screen disappears.
At key-off, no information is displayed but the function continues to monitor tyre pressure while the vehicle is
parked.
If the fault persists at the subsequent key-on, the specific screen is shown again on the display.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 20
TYRES screen: the driver may recall the screen by using the controls on the left hand TFT display, enabling
identification of tyres with insufficient pressure at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel
is generating the fault signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the screen
is not recallable by the driver.
When the TPMS system has not been calibrated or a tyre has been replaced, the TFT display displays the
specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the message "Execute calibration".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the default
screen is shown automatically.
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until the system is
calibrated.
The system may be calibrated via the specific option in the menu, in key-on state with the engine off.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 20
Upon selection of the menu option and subsequent successful calibration, the TFT display displays the specific
message "Calibration activated" for 5 seconds.
In “Calibration activated” state, the TYRES screen is recallable, but the pressure and temperature values are
replaced by dashes.
- TPMS failure
In the event of a fault in the circuit and/or wiring harness leading to the ECU, or in the event of a TPMS ECU
fault, or in the event of no signal reception from one or more sensors due to fault, breakage or flat battery,
the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS failure".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the default
screen is shown automatically.
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until normal operating
conditions are restored.
The TYRES screen is not recallable by the driver.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 20
- Punctured tyre
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of one
or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure” together with
the message "Do not proceed", without the vehicle symbol.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of one
or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre
pressure” together with the message "Do not proceed" and the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
The background of the box indicating the pressure and relative unit of measurement for the faulty tyre turns
amber.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 7 of 20
m
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of one
.co
or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure” together with
the message "Max speed 80 Km/h" without the vehicle symbol.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
es
uid
-g
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of one
or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low
tyre pressure” together with the message "Max speed 80 Km/h" and the vehicle symbol indicating tyre
pressures.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
all
The instrument panel also calculates (but does not display) the remaining range in Km (or mi) and repeats the
warning after 50 Km (31 mi).
In the event of a puncture to another tyre, the instrument calculates (but does not display) the updated
remaining range in Km (mi), in relation to the distance driven since the previous puncture event.
After the display cycle for the screen is complete, the screen disappears, but the relative indicator light remains
lit continuously.
Pressing the “Escape” function key during the display of faults with priority 0 (standard type tyre puncture) or
priority 1/ 2 (RUN FLAT tyre puncture, with speed limit not exceeded and with tyres still in usable condition)
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 20
cancels the screen while leaving the relative warning light lit.
TYRES screen: the screen may be recalled using the controls on the left hand TFT display, enabling the driver
to identify punctured tyres at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel is generating the
fault signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the screen is not recallable
by the driver.
In the event of antenna reception disturbance caused by an RF source transmitting in the same frequency range
as the sensors, or in the event of sensor overheat, or during calibration, or if the ECU does not recognise the
sensor identifiers, the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive".
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until normal operating
conditions are restored.
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but the
warning light remains lit.
The TYRES screen is not recallable by the driver.
- "TPMS inactive"
When the system has been disabled via the diagnostic tester, the TFT display displays the specific
message "TPMS inactive".
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until normal operating
conditions are restored.
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but the
warning light remains lit.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 10 of 20
The sensors are mounted to the wheel rim and secured by the inflation valve.
The sensor must be correctly fixed to the valve for the system to function.
ALWAYS replace with new components when REMOVING the TPMS sensor, complete with valve, from
the rim.
Replace the entire sensor-valve assembly even if only one of the components is damaged.
Detaching the tyre from the rim without due caution may cause irreparable damage to the sensor.
ALWAYS replace with new components when REMOVING the TPMS sensor, complete with valve, from
the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
Replace the entire sensor-valve assembly even if only one of the components is damaged.
When replacing the tyre pressure sensors, carry out the new ECU sensor acquisition procedure with the
DEIS tester.
Always finish all the components in the batch opened previously before starting a new sensor batch, as
the sensors are equipped with a battery with a limited lifespan.
Once the sensor has been activated, the internal battery has a lifespan of approximately 10 years.
ALWAYS replace with new components when REMOVING the TPMS sensor, complete with valve, from
the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
Replace the entire sensor-valve assembly even if only one of the components is damaged.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 12 of 20
m
.co
Clean the sensor mating area on the wheel rim.
Check that the sensor frequency matches the system frequency: 433 MHz for the STANDARD version, white
label on sensor; 315 MHz for the JAPAN version, blue label on sensor.
Fit the insulating washer (3) and tighten the nut (2)
fully.
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 20
Fit the rod (1) in the radial hole of the valve and
tighten the nut (2).
ALWAYS use a torque wrench, using only certified
and calibrated tools to ensure that the correct
tightening torque is achieved.
Located under the vehicle, covered by the centre flat undertray section.
m
.co Undo the union (8).
Undo the indicated screws and remove the bracket
(9).
Remove the lower part of the pillory block (10).
es
uid
brackets.
Remove the AC system pipe (2).
Remove the engine cooling system pipe (3).
all
Tyre pressure monitoring systemAll manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 18 of 20
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
.co
The fluid contained in the brake system is harmful in the event of contact with the eyes or skin.
es
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the affected area immediately with plenty of running water.
Brake fluid may also damage paintwork.
The brake fluid reservoir is located at the centre of the luggage compartment, underneath the right hand
underwindscreen shield.
uid
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
or skin.
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the
affected area immediately with plenty of
running water.
Brake fluid may also damage paintwork.
Print Exit
Check that the disc is in proper working condition and inspect the disc contact surface, even if new.
If any dirt, stains or greasy/oily patches are noted on the disc surface, clean thoroughly with a regular solvent,
degreaser and/or soap and water.
Brake discs All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 2
Print Exit
m
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove the front wheels only.
.co
and detach it from the relative mounting bracket.
Remove the indicated cable ties.
es
uid
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Fit the lower pin (4) in the relative seat, tapping into
place with a suitable mallet and punch.
Fit the spring (3) in the relative seat.
Fit the upper pin (2) in the relative seat, tapping into
place with a suitable mallet and punch.
Sliding pad wear sensor cable inside rigid brake
fluid pipe connected to brake calliper, tighten a
new cable tie in the indicated point.
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Brake pads All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 5
The following procedure is applicable for both CCM1 and CCM2 brake systems and must be performed EACH
TIME the CCM brake pads and/or CCM brake discs are replaced.
Brake 16 times from 80 Km/h to 20 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without activating
the ABS system.
Leave the brake system to cool for approximately 120 seconds.
Brake 16 times from 120 Km/h to 20 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without activating
the ABS system.
Leave the system to cool for 180 seconds.
The ABS system must be triggered during the last set of braking runs.
Brake AT LEAST 5 times from 120 Km/h to 0 Km/h (vehicle completely stopped), causing the ABS system
to activate.
Allow the brake system to cool completely before using the vehicle again after the bedding-in procedure
to ensure maximum braking efficacy.
As soon as you notice an increase in brake pedal travel, stop the car and wait for the brake system to cool
completely.
Brake 16 times from 80 Km/h to 20 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without activating
the ABS system.
Leave the brake system to cool for approximately 120 seconds.
Brake 16 times from 120 Km/h to 20 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without activating
the ABS system.
Leave the system to cool for 180 seconds.
The ABS system must be triggered during the last set of braking runs.
Brake AT LEAST 5 times from 160 Km/h to 0 Km/h (vehicle completely stopped), causing the ABS system
to activate.
Allow the brake system to cool completely before using the vehicle again after the bedding-in procedure
to ensure maximum braking efficacy.
As soon as you notice an increase in brake pedal travel, stop the car and wait for the brake system to cool
completely.
Brake callipers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
The fluid contained in the brake system is harmful in the event of contact with the eyes or skin.
m
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the affected area immediately with plenty of running water.
Brake fluid may also damage paintwork.
.co Undo the union (1) for the rigid pipe on the calliper.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the front brake
calliper (A).
Remove the front brake calliper (A) from the front
suspension.
es
uid
The fluid contained in the brake system is harmful in the event of contact with the eyes or skin.
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the affected area immediately with plenty of running water.
Brake fluid may also damage paintwork.
Fit the flexible hose onto the calliper and tighten the
union (1).
Print Exit
The electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit is located inside the luggage compartment to the right of the
heater/evaporator unit.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
.co
Screw 18 Nm B
Print Exit
the parking brake is engaged and released with the specific control on the dashboard, to the left of the
steering wheel;
the brake is actuated by an electric motor;
the brake engages automatically when the engine is switched off (Autohold function);
it may be used as an emergency brake with the vehicle in motion. In this case, the system applies the brakes
to all four wheels for as long as the button is kept pressed, dialoguing with the ESP stability control
system, which prevents wheel lockup;
ensures optimised brake release dynamics for hill starts with the Automatic Vehicle Holding (AVH) function:
when certain conditions are met, the system keeps the vehicle braked by releasing the brake shoes and
callipers at different times, allowing the driver enough time to move the foot from the brake to the
accelerator without the vehicle rolling backwards.
A - ECU
B - Equaliser bracket
C - Bowden cables
D - Shoes
The EPB electric parking brake is engaged automatically at each Key-off, as the Autohold function is always
enabled by default.
The following procedure disables the Autohold function to impede automatic engagement of the EPB electric
parking brake at Key-off: no maintenance is possible on the components of the EPB system while the EPB
electric parking brake is engaged, as a result, this procedure is necessary before carrying out any work
involving the components of the EPB electric parking brake.
The Autohold function will resume normal operation at the next Key-on, and the EPB electric parking brake will
therefore be automatically engaged at the next Key-off.
Wait until the respective indicator light on the instrument panel extinguishes.
EPB electric parking brake All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 17
CAUTION
When the electric parking brake is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the Park Lock safety device, if engaged.
To hold the vehicle, the Park Lock safety system must be engaged: ensure that the letter "P" is shown on the
gearbox display.
If the electric parking brake cannot be released due to a flat battery or a failure of the electrical system
controlling the function and the vehicle must be moved, carry out the following emergency release procedure.
EPB electric parking brake All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 17
m
.co
Fit the articulated wrench, p/n 261346, into the
relative hole underneath the slotted cap (1) on
the right hand rear wheelhouse, and turn
clockwise to loosen the parking brake cables
completely and release the grip of the shoes on
the rear discs.
The wrench must be turned approximately 50
times to completely release the parking brake;
es
the brake will begin to release after
approximately 20 turns.
uid
After manually releasing the electric parking brake, at the subsequent Key-on, the EPB node
registers a "fault" and the symbol shown aside is displayed on the left hand TFT display,
together with the message "Parking Brake system revision. Go to dealer”.
-g
CAUTION
For safety reasons, it is IMPERATIVE that the following indications are followed correctly.
all
The parking brake will return to normal functionality, however, the vehicle must still be taken to a Ferrari
service centre to calibrate the system and delete any errors from the failure memory. The system must be
calibrated for safety reasons.
The following procedure is for removing the rear right hand wheel brake shoes.
With the exception of the specific steps indicated, the procedure for removing the rear left hand wheel brake
shoes is the same.
EPB electric parking brake All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 17
m
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the right hand
EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) onto the rear right
hand hub carrier.
m
.co Undo the indicated screw.
Unscrew the stud bolt (17) retaining the right hand
es
EPB Bowden cable (B).
uid
-g
After replacing the EPB brake shoes, the parking brake must be adjusted correctly with the following procedure.
Print Exit
m
Unscrew the unions (2) on the brake pump.
Move the pipes (1) as far away as possible from the
brake pump, taking care not to bend or twist
them, so that they do not hinder the subsequent
.co
operations.
Detach the vacuum pipe (4) from the brake servo
(A).
Remove the indicated clamps and disconnect the
pipes (3).
Fit the unions (2) for the pipes (1) in the respective
seats on the pump and tighten.
Print Exit
m
Screw 8.5 Nm B
In some of the following photographs, the dashboard has been removed from the passenger compartment to
illustrate the procedure more clearly.
.co
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the mats ( E4.05).
Remove the driver side underdashboard mat.
Print Exit
m
.co
Tighten the cap (B) firmly onto the brake fluid
es reservoir.
uid
After the procedure, there must be no sponginess notable in the brake pedal and the braking action must be
progressive, starting immediately after a short free play.
Refit the wheels ( D2.01).
Complete suspension All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 25
Print Exit
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand front suspension.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension is the same.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse and the front flat undertray
section removed. However, removal of these components is not necessary.
m
.co Using a delible yellow marker pen or paint, make
reference markings on the threaded rods and
relative nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs
fastening the upper arm.
es
uid
(d).
Move the shock absorber aside to facilitate the
operation.
Complete suspension All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 25
Remove the complete suspension from its seat, retrieving the four washers of upper lever stud bolts.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension is the same.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse and the front flat undertray
section removed. However, removal of these components is not necessary.
Position the four washers onto upper arm stud bolts, and position the complete suspension inside its seat,
supporting its weight adequately.
m
.co Tighten the nut (7) fastening the ground cable.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 6 Nm B
uid
Fit the union (15) for the lift system fluid hose onto
-g
Fit the union (12) for the brake fluid hose onto the
relevant mounting bracket.
Refit the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for the
brake fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the brake fluid hose union (10).
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension.
The process for removing the left hand rear suspension is identical.
Detach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable from the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
m
toe-in tie-rod (C) to the chassis.
.co
es
Check that the yellow reference markings are
correctly aligned: the marking on the threaded
rods and the marking on the eyebolts must be
aligned.
Only the nut must turn, the threaded rod must
remain in its original position.
uid
Remove the complete rear suspension from the vehicle, retrieving the two washers of upper lever stud bolts.
Complete suspension All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 19 of 25
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension.
The process for refitting the left hand rear suspension is identical.
Position the two washers onto upper lever stud bolts, and then position the rear suspension inside the relative
seat, supporting its weight adequately.
Complete suspension All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 20 of 25
m
drivers.
.co
Replacement is NOT necessary if the nuts are
loosened only.
Refit the clip (9) fastening the union for the brake
fluid hose (11) onto the relevant mounting
bracket.
Attach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable to the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
Complete suspension All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 25 of 25
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 6 Nm B
.co
Attach the cable grommet (6) to the relative bracket
on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Fit a new cable tie (5) for retaining cables.
Print Exit
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc and ball joint.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.
Undo the nut (3) fastening the upper arm (B) to the
hub carrier (C), retrieving the relevant washer.
Remove upper lever (B) of front suspension from
the relative seat, retrieving the four washers from
the relative stud bolts.
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc and ball joint.
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.
m
.co Remove the yellow reference markings made
during removal.
Using an indelible red marker pen or paint, make
reference markings on the stud bolts and relative
nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs fastening
es
the upper arm.
uid
Screw 110 Nm A
Suspension arms All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 24
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc and ball joint.
The following procedure is for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm.
The procedure for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm is the same.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse and the front flat undertray
section removed. However, removal of these components is not necessary.
Remove the lower front suspension arm from its relevant seat.
m
Fit the four shims (5) in the relevant seats, pushing
down completely onto the stud bolts and
ensuring that they are perfectly perpendicular to
the horizontal axis of the Flanblocs.
Clean the mating surfaces with a degreasing
.co
product (heptane).
DO NOT use lubricants or electric/pneumatic
drivers.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.
Holding the pin (1) still, undo the nut (2) and retrieve
the relevant washers.
Remove the pin (1) from the relevant seat.
DO NOT use lubricants or electric/pneumatic
drivers.
Remove upper arm of rear suspension from the relative seat, retrieving the two washers from the relative stud
bolts.
Suspension arms All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 24
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.
m
.co Detach and remove the rubber plug (D) from the
rear of the lower arm.
es
uid
Remove the lower rear suspension arm from its relevant seat.
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.
Align the lower arm with the link and the hub carrier
then fit the screw (3) in the relevant holes.
Fit the relative washer and tighten the nut (2)
fastening the screw (3).
m
.co
Press the rubber plug (D) by hand into its relevant
es seat at the rear of the lower arm.
uid
Holding the pin (1) still, undo the nut (2) and retrieve
the relevant washers.
DO NOT use lubricants or electric/pneumatic
drivers.
Print Exit
m
Remove the front brake callipers ( D3.05).
Remove the brake discs ( D3.03).
.co
Remove the front disc.
m
.co
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 6 Nm B
Undo the screw (9) fastening the link (F) to the hub
carrier (E).
Remove the link (F) from the hub carrier (E) and
retrieve the compensator ring (10).
Hub carriers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 11
When refitting the same hub carrier, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH
RETAINING COMPOUND.
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from the
axle shaft.
Hub carriers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 9 of 11
Fit the hub carrier (E), fitting the axle shaft into the
relative seat on the wheel bearing.
Tighten the nut (8).
Fit the link (F) and the compensator ring (10) in the
relative seat on the hub carrier (E).
Apply an even layer of grease Z2 PROTECTION to
the inner surface of the compensator ring (10) in
contact with the screw head (9).
Fasten the link (F) to the hub carrier (E), fitting and
tightening the screw (9).
m
.co
Refit the EPB electric parking brake shoes ( D3.07).
Refit the brake discs ( D3.03).
Refit the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).
es
uid
-g
all
Shock absorbers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 16
Print Exit
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand front shock absorber is the same.
Remove upper arm from the relative stud bolts, retrieving the four washers, and slightly turn it toward the front
of the vehicle.
Remove the shock absorber from the relative seat.
Shock absorbers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 16
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front shock absorber is the same.
Fit the union (7) for the lift system fluid hose onto
the relative mounting bracket.
Refit the clip (6) fastening the union (7) for the lift
system fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the lift system fluid hose union (5).
m
time they are removed.
Replacement is NOT necessary if the nuts are
loosened only.
.co
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the upper
arm (B) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
Move the shock absorber aside to facilitate the
operation.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
uid
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.
m
.co
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Refit the wheels ( D2.01).
Perform the vehicle set-up procedure ( A3.22).
To replace a component of the front shock absorber. Remove the front shock absorber ( D4.04).
To replace a component of the rear shock absorber. Remove the rear shock absorber ( D4.04).
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must be
observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
Disassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber on a vehicle with "Front Lift"
system (optional, applicable for front shock absorbers only)
Shock absorbers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 12 of 16
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must be
observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is fastened to
the shock absorber strut.
Reassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber on a vehicle with "Front Lift"
system (optional, applicable for front shock absorbers only)
Shock absorbers All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 14 of 16
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is fastened to
the shock absorber strut.
The distance (L) from the disc to the lower fulcrum axis must be adjusted in accordance with the spring fitted
and the type of shock absorber on which it is fitted. Two different spring sizes are available with different
control load tolerances, identifiable by the different colours stamped on a coil turn.
m
.co
Length of front variable setting shock absorber
White 260.2 mm
es
Length of rear variable setting shock absorber
Yellow 227.4 mm
uid
Print Exit
Remove the rear stabiliser bar, complete with bushings, from the vehicle, removing via the wheelhouse.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Spherical tie-rod - lower arm Spherical tie-rod 50 Nm B
Fastening rear stabiliser bar to tie-rod Nut 50 Nm B
.co
Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse.
direction.
Tighten the ball stud (2) fitting the relevant washer.
m
.co
Refit the wheels ( D2.01).
Print Exit
System function
This vehicle is equipped with the latest generation MagneRide™ magnetorheologically controlled suspension, a
system that continuously and automatically controls suspension damping developed by Delphi and honed by
Ferrari.
By processing data received from the vehicle dynamics sensors measuring the movements of the bodyshell, the
ECU determines the road surface conditions and instantaneously adapts the response of the suspension
accordingly, by varying the control current for each shock absorber.
These sensors allow the ECU to calculate vehicle speed, vertical and lateral acceleration, steering angle and
instantaneous brake system pressure, and therefore control suspension damping in relation to these
parameters.
Damping at each wheel is adjusted by a magnetorheological fluid which changes in density in relation to a
magnetic field applied to the suspension.
Suspension damping control system
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 5
The magnetorheological (MR) fluid is an oil containing a suspension of spherical ferromagnetic particles
measuring a few microns in diameter.
Using an electric current to apply a magnetic field to the oil, the viscosity of the oil may be varied.
By varying the magnetic field applied to the MR fluid flowing in a duct, its pressure and flow rate characteristics
may be adjusted in real time without the use of any external mechanical moving parts or actuators.
As well as ensuring the perfect balance between handling and comfort at all times, through specific calibrations
selectable from the Manettino driving mode selector, this system can also shift the bias slightly towards one
or the other of these two aspects.
Three different calibration levels are used on this vehicle:
Level 1 (COMFORT): a slightly softer calibration optimised to absorb bumps better and to offer improved grip
in wet conditions (“Low Grip” Manettino setting).
Level 2 (SPORT): a slightly stiffer calibration optimised for sports and high speed use (in medium to high grip
conditions) without drastically compromising comfort (SPORT and ESC OFF Manettino settings).
Level 3 (RACE): an even stiffer calibration optimised for track use (RACE, CT OFF and CST OFF Manettino
settings).
System layout
Suspension damping control system
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 5
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand front motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand front motion sensor is identical.
Suspension damping control system
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 5
m
Fit the new front NRRPS motion sensor (A) in its
seat, complete with relative mounting bracket.
Tighten the two indicated screws fastening the front
NRRPS motion sensor mounting bracket (A).
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand rear NRRPS motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand rear NRRPS motion sensor is identical.
Print Exit
Set the vehicle on a flat surface and "filled with the correct quantities of fluids" with a full tank of fuel and the
electric parking brake activated.
Toe-in is measured over a diameter of 495 mm.
The following set-up data is relative to the car WITHOUT SAND BAGS.
Toe-in
Total On wheel
Vehicle set-up All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 4
Total On wheel
Front -2 ± 0.5 mm -1 ± 0.25 mm
Rear 3 ± 0.5 mm 1.5 ± 0.25 mm
Height check
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the front section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (A) (external surface of the hole), must
correspond to the specified set-up values.
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the rear section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (B) (internal surface of the hole), must
correspond to the specified set-up values.
Front suspension
- Wheel camber -
Vehicle set-up All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 4
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (1) and fit new shims
(2) to obtain a camber angle between the prescribed values, proceeding as described in chapter D4.02.
- Toe-in -
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
Make sure that the steering box is in central position and that the steering wheel is perfectly horizontal. To
assess this condition, use a mounting fitted with a spirit level. In this position, the two lateral tie-rods must
be equal in length. If they are not equal, adjust them.
Loosen the nuts (3) and turn the lateral tie-rods (4), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a
toe-in value within the prescribed values.
Tighten the nuts (3) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
Rear suspension
- Wheel camber -
Vehicle set-up All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 4
m
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
.co
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (5) and fit new shims
(6) to obtain a camber angle between the prescribed values, proceeding as described in chapter D4.02.
- Toe-in -
es
uid
-g
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
Loosen the nuts (7) and turn the tie-rods (8), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a toe-in
value within the prescribed values.
Tighten the nuts (7) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
all
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front All
suspension lift user
manuals and (optional)
guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 10
Print Exit
System layout
A - Tank
B - Electric pump
C - Union block
CAUTION
The system is not designed to remain active with the engine switched off while the vehicle is parked.
If the vehicle is switched off with the lift function active, the vehicle lowers after 15 seconds.
Do not use the front lift to park the vehicle on obstacles (e.g. kerbs) as the front of the vehicle may come
into contact with the obstacle and be damaged when the lift function deactivates.
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front All
suspension lift user
manuals and (optional)
guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 10
The “Front Lift” system uses the front shock absorbers to raise the front of the vehicle by approximately 40 mm,
to allow access to garages or steep ramps without damaging the vehicle.
The “Front Lift” system may be activated with the engine on and at speeds not greater than 40 Km/h by
pressing the relative button on the centre console.
At speeds above 40 Km/h, the "Front Lift" system is disabled. If already active, the system deactivates
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 40 Km/h.
In the event of engine malfunction, the “Front Lift” system may still be activated by pressing and holding the
relative button for 10 seconds.
While the “Front Lift” system is raising the front of the vehicle, the specific indicator flashes and the TFT display
displays the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing upward, together with the specific message "Front
Lift moving".
While the system is active, the TFT display shows the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing upward
together with the specific message "Front Lift ON".
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front All
suspension lift user
manuals and (optional)
guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 10
If the ignition switch is turned to 0 while the system is active, the TFT display displays the vehicle symbol with a
white arrow pointing upward with the specific message "Front Lift ON", together with the message "Set
Front Lift to OFF".
While the “Front Lift” system is lowering the front of the vehicle, the specific indicator flashes and the TFT
display displays the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing downward, together with the specific
message "Front Lift moving".
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front All
suspension lift user
manuals and (optional)
guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 10
If the system is inhibited, the TFT display shows the vehicle symbol with a red arrow pointing upward together
with the specific message "Front Lift inhibited".
The electric pump is located in front of the rear right hand wheel bay.
m
.co
Undo the union (1) on the pipe (2).
Place a container under the pipe (2).
Pour the fluid drained from the system into a
container and seal it. DO NOT DISPOSE OF
USED FLUID IN THE ENVIRONMENT.
Check the fluid level in the "Front Lift" hydraulic system ( D4.08).
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Refit the right hand cosmetic shield.
m
.co
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Refit the right hand cosmetic shield.
es
uid
-g
all
Steering system layout All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
Print Exit
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
For vehicles UP TO Ass.ly No. 98001 when replacing the power steering fluid reservoir, the pipe from the power
steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump and the pipe from the underbody to the power steering
fluid reservoir, the components of either RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917, or of RETROFIT KIT Part No.
279662, must be used, referring to the indications given in the Spare Parts Catalogue.
The components of RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917 and RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279662 are solely compatible
with the power steering fluid prescribed FROM Ass.ly No. 98002.
Empty the tank, aspirating and collecting the fluid with a suitable syringe.
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
For vehicles UP TO Ass.ly No. 98001 when replacing the power steering fluid reservoir, the pipe from the power
steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump and the pipe from the underbody to the power steering
fluid reservoir, the components of either RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917, or of RETROFIT KIT Part No.
279662, must be used, referring to the indications given in the Spare Parts Catalogue.
The components of RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917 and RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279662 are solely compatible
with the power steering fluid prescribed FROM Ass.ly No. 98002.
Power steering tank All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 3
Print Exit
m
.co
The majority of cases of NOISY power steering pump operation are caused by contaminated fluid in the
system; therefore, attempt to rectify the failure before replacing the power steering pump, replacing
the power steering fluid tank ALWAYS. Fit the new tank correctly, ensuring that the tank cap and
es
breather are exactly as specified in the respective vehicle layout to prevent infiltration, which will
contaminate the power steering fluid. Then fill the power steering system with fluid and bleed and
perform another pump function test. Only replace the power steering pump if the problem persists.
(Ref: Technical Information No. 1695 _ December 2008)
The majority of cases of NOISY power steering pump operation are caused by contaminated fluid in the
system; therefore, attempt to rectify the failure before replacing the power steering pump, replacing
the power steering fluid tank ALWAYS. Fit the new tank correctly, ensuring that the tank cap and
breather are exactly as specified in the respective vehicle layout to prevent infiltration, which will
contaminate the power steering fluid. Then fill the power steering system with fluid and bleed and
perform another pump function test. Only replace the power steering pump if the problem persists.
(Ref: Technical Information No. 1695 _ December 2008)
Fit the cover (3) onto the power steering pump and
fasten by hand tightening the screws (8).
m
.co
Fit and fasten the heat shield on the compressor
(1), tightening the screw indicated.
Print Exit
Undo the nut (2) fastening the left hand tie-rod (B)
to the left hand hub carrier (C).
Disconnect the left hand tie-rod (B) from the left
hand hub carrier (C).
Steering box All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 8
Undo the nut (2) fastening the right hand tie-rod (B)
to the right hand hub carrier (C).
Disconnect the right hand tie-rod (B) from the right
hand hub carrier (C).
m
Refitting the steering box
.co
es
uid
Fit the mounting (4) and the relative shim (5) on the
steering box (A).
On the right hand side, tighten the indicated screws
fastening the steering box (A) to the chassis.
Steering box All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 8
Pre-tighten and definitively tighten the steering box fastener screws in a cross pattern.
Print Exit
m
Drain the power steering system (
Remove the luggage compartment tub (
Remove the front bumper ( E3.03).
.co
D5.08).
E4.07).
New solution
Fit the lower radiator air duct (A) in the relative seat,
installing from the front of the vehicle.
Tighten the indicated outer screws fastening the
lower radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.
New solution
m
.co
Tighten the indicated inner screws fastening the
lower radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
.co Mark the position of the steering column with
respect to the steering box shaft.
Undo the indicated screw.
Remove the steering column (A) from the steering
box.
es
uid
Print Exit
m
Remove the left hand element of the front flat undertray section.
.co
es
uid
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is
harmful to the eyes and skin and may also
damage the vehicle bodywork.
Lift the vehicle with a vehicle lift so that the wheels are not in contact with the ground.
Start the engine and run at idle speed for 1 minute.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Lower the vehicle to bring the wheels into contact with the ground.
Wait for the engine coolant temperature to reach 90°C.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Print Exit
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening wheelhouse Screw 3 Nm C
Fastening luggage compartment tub Screw 8 Nm C
.co
Fastening underwindscreen shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Fastening flat undertray elements Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening luggage compartment shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening lower gearbox mounting cross member Screw 60 Nm A
to chassis
Fastening removable subframe to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
es
Fastening seat Screw 40 Nm B
Fastening F1 shift paddles Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening steering angle sensor mounting to Screw 6 Nm B
steering column
Fastening cabin light Screw 3 Nm B
uid
Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening for lateral engine strut mounting point Screw 30 Nm A
extrusion of rear subframe.
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
Fastening sill connector cross member area of Screw 60 Nm A
rear subframe (on bushing)
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
Fastening for rear subframe in rear part of rear Screw 20 Nm B
suspension mounting casting
Fastening rear subframe in rear radiator area Screw 9 Nm C
Tightening torques All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 3
Print Exit
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
General All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
E2.01 General
As already seen on the California, a "Space-frame" architecture has been adopted for the aluminium chassis,
meaning less weight, for improved performance and safety, and greater torsional stiffness, for superior
dynamic qualities.
Using a modular chassis also introduces the following advantages:
greater service efficiency and shorter service times;
easier maintenance from a Client perspective;
reduced replacement times for damaged parts;
reduced running costs.
Rear removable engine-gearboxAll
assembly
manualsmounting subframe
and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 58
Print Exit
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY RETAINERS
INSTALLED.
m
.co Detach the cable (7) for emergency release of the
engine compartment lid lock, removing the
indicated clamps.
Detach the cable (9) for the fuel filler flap
emergency release, by loosening the nut
es
indicated by the red arrow.
uid
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and undo the
indicated nut fastening the cable (45).
Detach the clamps retaining the cable (45) to the
chassis.
Pull out the right hand injection cable (22) and place
on top of the intake manifold.
m
.co Release the left hand injection cable (28), removing
the indicated clamps.
Disconnect the front left hand oxygen sensor
connector (29) and remove the indicated clips.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the fuel vapour
es
separator mounting bracket (30) to the chassis.
uid
Pull out the left hand injection cable (28) and place
on top of the intake manifold.
m
.co On the right hand rear suspension, undo the
indicated nut fastening the ground cable (60)
and cut the cable tie indicated by the red arrow.
es
uid
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues
may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after
the operations described.
m
coupling (76).
Remove the clamp (73) and disconnect the vent
pipe leading from the radiator to the header tank.
Detach the brake fluid pipe from the indicated clip.
.co
Undo the union (74) on the brake fluid pipe leading
to the rear calliper.
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Make reference markings at the rear subframe fastener points to facilitate reassembly.
Rear removable engine-gearboxAll
assembly
manualsmounting subframe
and user guides at all-guides.com Page 24 of 58
Right-hand side
m
.co Left-hand side
Right-hand side
-g
Left-hand side
CAUTION
To ensure safety, the following procedure for placing
the support trolley in position must be carried out
exactly as described.
CAUTION
ALWAYS ensure that the tool pins are correctly
located in the respective holes in the chassis.
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
m
Lower completely, move away from underneath the
vehicle and set the complete rear subframe
down in a safe place.
.co
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening rear subframe in rear suspension Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
mounting casting area screw
Screw 110 Nm A
Fastening for lateral front part of rear subframe Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
screw
uid
Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening for lateral engine strut mounting point Screw 30 Nm A
extrusion of rear subframe.
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
Fastening sill connector cross member area of Screw 60 Nm A
rear subframe (on bushing)
-g
Clean the seats for the fasteners and the fasteners themselves, both on the rear subframe and on the vehicle
chassis, to remove any dirt or adhesive residue.
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
m
point extrusion.
.co
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 30 Nm A
es
CAUTION
Before removing the lift trolley, ensure that the screws are all correctly fastened.
Using the relevant lowering handle, slowly lower the trolley and remove from underneath the vehicle.
uid
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
m
.co
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801
m
leading to the rear calliper.
.co
Tightening torque Nm Class
Union 16 Nm B
Union 16 Nm B
all
Rear removable engine-gearboxAll
assembly
manualsmounting subframe
and user guides at all-guides.com Page 45 of 58
m
.co Fasten the indicated clamps and connect the
connectors (16).
es
uid
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and tighten the
indicated nut fastening the cable (45).
Fit the cable retainer clamps (45) as originally
installed on the chassis.
Rear removable engine-gearboxAll
assembly
manualsmounting subframe
and user guides at all-guides.com Page 54 of 58
Right-hand side
m
.co Left-hand side
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802. Refit the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Refit the engine compartment lid lock ( E5.11).
Refit the expansion tank ( B6.02).
Refit the engine air ducts ( B4.02).
Refit the rear bumper ( E3.04).
Refit the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Add fuel to the tanks.
Fill the cooling system ( A3.07).
Fill the power steering system ( D5.08).
Charge the air conditioning system. ( F5.12).
Fill and bleed the brake system ( D3.10).
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Lower the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Perform the vehicle set-up procedure ( A3.22).
Engine compartment lid All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
m
.co
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Remove the right hand engine compartment shield.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
all
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
m
.co
If the alignment is not correct, undo the indicated
screws and add or remove the shims (1)
between the grille (A) and mounting bracket (B).
Add or remove only where necessary.
es
uid
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment and
when installing the new windscreen.
Using specific pneumatic cutter tools, cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the engine compartment
lid window, working from inside the engine compartment inner.
Using suction cup handles, remove the engine compartment lid window from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the assistance of another operator.
Clean the engine compartment lid window mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with
heptane to remove all traces of adhesive or dust.
Engine compartment lid All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 9 of 11
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell must take place with no possibility of delay within 5 minutes
from the application of the adhesive tape.
Hold the engine compartment lid glass parallel to the mating surface and fit onto the bodyshell.
Press along the entire perimeter of the engine compartment lid window.
m
.co
Connect the connector (3).
es Fasten the indicated clip.
uid
Print Exit
When the same luggage compartment lid is to be reused, mark the positions of the hinges on the lid itself to
facilitate adjustment.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
When refitting the same luggage compartment lid removed previously, fit the lid onto the relative hinges on
the markings made during removal to facilitate subsequent adjustment.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
Print Exit
m
.co For vehicles featuring front parking sensors only
m
.co
Refit the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Refit the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Print Exit
Remove the rear bumper from the relative seat, detaching the relative centre fastener clips.
Fit the rear bumper in the relevant seat, installing the relevant centre fastener clips.
m
.co Tighten the indicated lateral right hand screws
fastening the rear bumper (A).
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 7.5 Nm C
uid
Screw 7.5 Nm C
Rear bumper All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 8
Left
Right
Print Exit
E3.05 Wheelhouse
The complete wheelhouse consists of two elements which may be removed independently.
If it is necessary to remove both elements of the front wheelhouse, remove the front element first and then the
rear one, as the front element overlaps the rear element.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand front wheelhouse.
The procedure for removing the right hand front wheelhouse is the same.
Front element
Rear element
Wheelhouse All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 8
m
Refitting the front wheelhouses
.co
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening wheelhouse Screw 3 Nm C
If it is necessary to refit both elements of the front wheelhouse, refit the rear element first and then the front one,
as the front element overlaps the rear element.
uid
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand front wheelhouse.
The procedure for refitting the right hand front wheelhouse is the same.
Rear element
-g
all
Wheelhouse All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 8
Front element
The rear wheelhouse consists of two elements which may be removed independently.
If it is necessary to remove both elements of the rear wheelhouse, remove the rear element first and then the
front one, as the rear element overlaps the front element.
Rear element
Front element
If it is necessary to refit both elements of the rear wheelhouse, refit the front element first and then the rear one,
as the rear element overlaps the front element.
Front element
m
.co
For the front left hand section only
Rear element
Print Exit
E3.06 Windscreen
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment and
when installing the new windscreen.
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the windscreen from inside
the passenger compartment.
Using suction cup handles, remove the windscreen from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the assistance of another operator.
Clean the windscreen mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with heptane to remove
all traces of adhesive or dust.
Degrease the perimeter on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and WypAll
X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
Windscreen All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 4
Before preparing the glass for installation, check there are no imperfections or scratches on the surface
or around the perimeter.
Set the glass panel carefully on a stable surface so that it is not scratched or damaged.
Degrease the perimeter of the glass with BETACLEAN 3300 cod. 81636500 and leave to dry.
m
sealant.
.co
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell must take place with no possibility of delay within 5 minutes
from the application of the adhesive tape.
Hold the windscreen parallel to the mating surface and fit onto the bodyshell.
Press along the entire perimeter of the windscreen and bring the lower edge against the alignment blocks
fitted previously.
Check that the gaps between the A pillars and the windscreen are uniform.
Apply a few strips of adhesive fabric tape SYROM 90, starting from the windscreen and fixing to the pillar and
es
roof.
Wait at least 3 hours, remove the adhesive tape and remove any sealant residue from the perimeter of the
windscreen with heptane.
Print Exit
E3.07 Quarterlights
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment and
when installing the new windscreen.
The quarterlights are supplied as spare parts complete with perimeter seal, which must not be separated from
the glass.
Detach the door perimeter seal in the area near the quarterlight.
Quarterlights All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 4
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the quarterlight from inside
the passenger compartment.
Using suction cup handles, remove the quarterlight from its seat.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork, around the perimeter of the quarterlight seat.
Take care not to damage the bodywork;
Degrease the perimeter on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and WypAll
X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
Refit the section of door perimeter seal near the quarterlight detached previously.
Refit the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).
Refit the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Doors All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 37
Print Exit
E3.08 Doors
m
Disconnect the connector (1).
Undo the screw (2).
Undo the screws (3).
.co
Remove the complete door (A).
es
uid
The door striker plate must be checked and adjusted with the door window completely raised.
m
.co
FROM Ass.ly No. 92282, for vehicles with carbon
fibre door panels only
m
.co
Push the seal (B) for the external body (A) of the
es external door handle into the relative seat.
uid
Our Spare Parts Service Dept. supplies a complete lock kit, therefore, when replacing the door lock
control block, all the locks on the vehicle must be replaced.
m
.co
Undo the indicated screw.
es
uid
Fit the tab (B) on the rear hole on the door window
(A).
Working with due caution, insert the door window
(A) through the upper slit in the door frame and
fit onto the relative mounting shoes.
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct intrusion into the seal.
m
.co Check that the door window (A) intrudes into the
door mirror triangle (B) by at least 3 mm.
If this measurement is incorrect, adjust as follows.
es
uid
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct intrusion into the seal.
Preload
m
.co
es Loosen the nut (6).
uid
Carry out test for water and air infiltration via door window ( E3.08).
Doors All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 28 of 37
m
Remove bracket (C).
Detach and remove the waterproof liner sheet (D).
Carefully remove the power window unit from the relative seat, removing first the rear guide and then the
motor and the front guide from the relative recess.
Doors All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 34 of 37
Carefully fit the new power window unit in the relative seat, fitting first the front guide and then the motor and
the rear guide in the relative recess.
m
.co Tighten the nut (3).
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 9.5 Nm B
uid
Fit the waterproof liner sheet (D) and glue into place.
Position bracket (C).
Tighten the nuts fastening the bracket (C).
Print Exit
Mark the position of the blades on the windscreen to ensure that the arms are installed in the correct positions
during reassembly.
m
Driver side arm
Print Exit
m
.co
Disconnect the connector (8).
Detach the wiring harness by releasing the
indicated clips.
Undo the screws indicated by the red arrows.
Remove the windscreen and headlight washer fluid
reservoir (A).
es
uid
Print Exit
Upper seal
Lower seal
Upper seal
Lower seal
m
Refitting the kickplate
Fit the door sill trim panel (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the lower screws indicated fastening the
door sill trim panel (A).
Print Exit
m
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
.co
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
es
vicinity of the vehicle.
indicated.
all
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting and user guides at all-guides.com
All manuals Page 2 of 27
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
The following procedure is for fitting the brackets (AV 8251), fitting the vehicle anti-tipping safety retainers
(AV 8183) to a two post vehicle lift and fitting the brackets (AV 8184) to a runway type car lift, and
subsequently lifting the vehicle.
The anti-tipping safety retainers must always be used when removing the engine, gearbox and the rear
subframe.
Fit the ring nuts (5) under the vehicle lift arms over
the centres of the holes previously used for the
rubber blocks, tightening to the bushings (2).
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5), hand
tighten the sleeves (2).
Tighten the bushings (6) to the eccentric pins (4).
Tighten the positioning levers (7) into the relative
holes on the bushings (6), which must be aligned
with the groove on the eccentric pins (4).
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting and user guides at all-guides.com
All manuals Page 6 of 27
m
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, the rear left hand fastener slot is
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle and the front left hand fastener slot is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
.co
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5), hand
tighten the sleeves (2).
The following procedure is for lowering the vehicle, removing the brackets (AV 8251), removing the vehicle anti-
tipping safety retainers (AV 8183) from a two post vehicle lift and removing the anti-tipping safety retainer
fastener brackets (AV 8184) from a runway type car lift.
m
.co Lower the vehicle lift arms until the car is the
desired height from the ground.
Loosen the screws (9) fastening the positioning
levers (7).
Tighten the positioning levers (7).
Turn the positioning levers (7) by 180°.
es
Tighten the screws (9) fastening the positioning
levers (7).
uid
Remove the vehicle lift arms from underneath the vehicle and lower the hydraulic jack positioned under the
lower gearbox mounting cross member.
Remove the two pads (A) from the front vehicle lift
points.
The front flat undertray section consists of a right hand element and a left hand element.
m
.co Left hand element
es
Undo the screws indicated fastening the left hand
element (A) of the front flat undertray section.
Remove the left hand element (A) of the front flat
undertray section from the relative seat.
uid
-g
The front flat undertray section consists of a right hand element and a left hand element.
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting and user guides at all-guides.com
All manuals Page 17 of 27
The central flat undertray section consists of a front element and a rear element.
Front element
Rear element
Front element
Rear element
m
.co Undo the four indicated screws fastening the right
hand duct (B) onto the rear flat undertray section
(A).
es
uid
(A).
all
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting and user guides at all-guides.com
All manuals Page 22 of 27
Remove the left hand duct (B) from the relative seat.
Place the lift pad of the right hand arm of the vehicle
lift correctly under the relative lift point.
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting and user guides at all-guides.com
All manuals Page 24 of 27
Place the lift pad of the left hand arm of the vehicle
lift correctly under the relative lift point.
Lift the vehicle sufficiently in order to be able to remove the rear flat undertray section.
m
.co
Tighten the four indicated screws fastening the left
hand duct (B) onto the rear flat undertray section
(A).
es
uid
Print Exit
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
Print Exit
m
.co
es
The cap is functionally substituted by two tandem flaps, (1) and (2), both of which fitted with an airtight seal and
a pressure relief safety valve calibrated at 120 mbar.
uid
-g
all
Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 10
The above image shows the capless filler neck with the fuel pump nozzle inserted and the flaps (1) and (2) open.
For safety reasons, the outer wall features a number of 'teeth' (3) that lock the outer flap: the only way to open
this flap is to insert the nozzle of a fuel station pump.
Do not force the outer flap by pushing with the fingers or attempt to open with inappropriate tools (e.g.
screwdriver): this may damage the outer flap mechanism and compromise seal integrity.
Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 10
The capless system is more reliable than a conventional filler cap system, as instead of an external cap, the
system is sealed by elements within the filler neck itself. Furthermore, the pump nozzle is guided more
positively into the filler neck during insertion that with a conventional filler system.
Insert the nozzle carefully into the filler neck to prevent damage to the mechanism seal.
After refuelling, wait approximately 5 seconds, then slowly remove the nozzle from the filler neck: this is
to allow any residual fuel in the nozzle to drain into the tank, preventing spillage onto the bodywork.
The pump nozzle is inserted into the filler neck until it comes into contact with the outer flange (4). More of the
pump nozzle remains outside the filler neck than with a conventional system; this is not a problem, as the
capless system has been specifically engineered to function correctly with the nozzle in this position.
Like a conventional filler neck, the capless system also has a retainer tongue for locking the pump nozzle (EU
and USA). By twisting the nozzle by 30° in either direction after insertion, the nozzle itself is held in place
during refuelling.
Do not attempt to insert funnels or portable jerry can spouts into the filler neck.
Should it be necessary to use a portable fuel container, only use the funnel included in the vehicle tool kit,
which is designed to activate the automatic release system.
Should it be necessary to refuel without access to a fuel station, a special funnel (A), shaped like the nozzle of a
petrol pump, is included in the tool kit. The funnel (A) releases the capless automatic sealing system.
Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 10
m
Tightening torque
Fastening fuel filler neck
.co
Fastening the fuel filler neck ground lug terminal
Screw
Nut
Nm
5 Nm
5 Nm
Class
B
B
Fit the filler neck (A) in the relative seat, taking care
not to damage the clip (4).
es
uid
-g
Close the fuel filler flap (A) and check that it sits
flush with the bodywork.
Tow hook All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
Tow hook
CAUTION
Always comply with road safety legislation when towing the vehicle.
Do not connect toe lines to suspension arms, suspension components or wheels. Connect only to the specific
tow hook, after fitting the toe hook in its relative mounting.
Remember that the power steering and brake servo do not function with the engine off.
Select the tow hook (A) from the tool bag in the
luggage compartment.
m
.co
Release the Park Lock carrying out the CAR WASH procedure, if possible, or carrying out the emergency
Park Lock release procedure.
Deactivate the Parking Brake, using the relative lever if possible, or carrying out the emergency electric
parking brake release procedure.
Keep the ignition key turned to II to enable the lights to work and to prevent the steering wheel from locking if
turned, to keep the Park Lock deactivated (when using the CAR WASH procedure) and to prevent electric
parking brake activation (if the AUTO PARK function is enabled).
es
uid
-g
all
Rear screen All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment and
when installing the new windscreen.
The rear screen is supplied as a spare part complete with perimeter seal, which must not be detached from the
glass.
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the rear screen from inside
the passenger compartment.
Using suction handles, remove the rear screen from its seat.
Rear screen All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 3
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork, around the perimeter of the rear screen seat.
Take care not to damage the bodywork;
Before preparing the glass for installation, check there are no imperfections or scratches on the surface
or around the perimeter.
Set the new glass onto the suction pad mounting, with the external side facing downwards.
Degrease and clean the perimeter of the glass with BETACLEAN 3300 cod. 81636500 and WypAll X60 _
Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
Degrease the mating surface on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and
WypAll X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
Working from inside the passenger compartment, use a spatula to press the adhesive into the gap and
remove any excess adhesive.
Working from the passenger compartment, remove the adhesive tape applied previously, taking care not to
soil any surrounding parts.
Leave to set for at least three hours, then remove the compression tool.
Print Exit
E4.01 Seats
m
.co
Remove the seat and detach the connectors (1) and
(2).
The driver seat has two connectors whereas the
passenger seat has only one connector.
es
uid
Fit the seat and connect the connectors (1) and (2).
The driver seat has two connectors whereas the
passenger seat has only one connector.
Tighten the screw fastening the seat belt (B) and fit
the relative cover indicated.
m
.co
Move the seat all the way forwards (A).
Tip the backrest (A) forwards.
Tighten the two front rear seat fastener screws (A)
indicated.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 24 Nm B
uid
Adjusting the height and/or inclination positions of the driver side seat cushion (optional for Super
Racing seat)
-g
The different seat cushion adjustment positions are set using the rear fastener screws.
The front fastener screws are used to move the seat cushion.
all
Seats All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 12
Adjusting the height and/or inclination positions of the driver side seat cushion (optional for Super
Racing seat)
Seat cushion height and inclination adjustment is only possible for the driver side Super Racing seat.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 24 Nm B
Print Exit
E4.02 Dashboard
The panel is mounted on the steering column and consists of two elements (a lower element and an upper
element).
m
.co Undo the nut fastening the lid (1) to the gas strut
(2), retrieving the screw and the washers.
es
uid
compartment.
all
Dashboard All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 64
Take out the glove box (4) complete with lower right
hand dashboard trim panel and connect the
connector (6) of the ON/OFF switch.
Fit the glove box (4) in the relative seat and connect
the connector (5) of the cabin light.
m
.co
Fasten the door (1) to the gas strut (2) fitting the
screw with the relative washers and tightening
the indicated nut.
Detach the lower left hand trim panel (A) from the
relative seat by prising out gently in the indicated
positions.
Dashboard All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 12 of 64
m
.co
Remove the upper trim from the dashboard.
Cosmetic grilles
es
uid
Passenger side
-g
Driver side
m
.co Undo the screws indicated.
es
uid
control connectors.
all
Dashboard All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 21 of 64
Once the vent trim (B) has been removed, the vent
control (C), the grille (D), the vent (E) and the
duct (F) may be replaced by undoing the
respective fastener screws.
Front trim
m
.co Undo the screws indicated.
es
uid
Hold the lower left hand trim panel (A) and connect
the connectors (1).
Fit the upper trim panel, pressing until it snaps audibly into place.
m
.co Hand tighten the indicated screw.
The indicated screw is only visible from
underneath the dashboard.
es
uid
Cosmetic grilles
Dashboard All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 32 of 64
Passenger side
Driver side
m
.co
Refit the lower left hand trim.
Refit the binnacle ( E4.02).
Front trim
m
.co Connect the connector (2).
es
uid
m
.co Undo the left hand screw indicated fastening the
bracket (4).
es
uid
m
.co Luggage compartment right-hand side
m
.co Luggage compartment right-hand side
Screw 60 Nm B
m
.co Connect the connectors (13).
es
uid
Screw 5 Nm C
Dashboard All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 61 of 64
Print Exit
m
Undo the screws indicated.
Detach the control panel (A).
.co
es
Detach the connector (1).
uid
m
.co
Fit and fasten the front glove compartment trim
panel (B) in the relevant seat, pressing down by
hand until it clicks audibly into place.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the front
glove compartment trim panel (B).
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 3 Nm C
uid
Print Exit
m
Rear screen lower trim panel
.co
es
uid
m
.co
Fit the lower lateral trim panel (G) in the relative
seat and press by hand in the indicated positions
until it clicks audibly into place.
es
uid
m
Screw 7 Nm B
.co
Refit the rear screen lower trim panel.
Refit the lower lateral trim panel.
Refit the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Refit the lateral roof trim panel and the rear screen cross member trim panel.
Sun visors
m
Lateral trim panels
.co Fit the lateral trim panel (D) in the relative seat and
press by hand in the indicated positions until it
clicks audibly into place.
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the lateral trim panel
es
(D).
Screw 7 Nm B
Sun visors
all
Passenger compartment and roofAll
trim panels
manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 20 of 22
Print Exit
E4.05 Mats
Removing mats
m
.co
Undo the indicated screws fastening the bracket (B).
Remove the bracket (B).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the footrest
mat (A).
Remove the footrest mat (A).
es
uid
relative loop.
all
Mats All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 17
Pedal mat
m
Floor mat, driver side
Remove the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel ( E5.11).
Remove the rear tunnel mat.
Remove the front tunnel mat.
Remove the rear shelf mat.
Refitting mats
m
Pedal mat
Fit and glue into place the footrest (A), fixing with
double sided adhesive tape.
Mats All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 17 of 17
m
Refit the lower driver side seal.
.co
Floor mat, passenger side
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
.co
Screw 8.5 Nm B
m
.co
Fit the section of luggage compartment seal (A)
next to the right hand underwindscreen shield
(B).
es
uid
Print Exit
m
.co
es
A - Left hand TFT display controls
B - EPB electric parking brake controls
C - External rear view mirror adjustment control
D - Light selector
uid
E - Instrument panel
F - Right hand TFT display (NIT) controls
G - A.C. control panel
A - Horn button
B - Turn indicator buttons
C - High beam light switch
D - Windscreen wiper controls
E - Suspension decoupling button
F - Manettino
G - Engine start button
Location of controls in vehicle All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 5
H - NIT controls
L - Shift paddles
Print Exit
This display is set in the instrument panel and has the following functions:
displaying control parameters;
displaying general information while driving;
indicating any faults.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 23
To interact with the system, selecting the desired configuration and setting parameters, use the controls on the
dashboard, on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Display areas
m
.co
es
uid
Once the fuel level enters reserve, in addition to the specific warning indicator illuminating on the dial, the
relative symbol and the specific message "Fuel level low" are shown on the display for 10 seconds,
together with the remaining range in Km.
If the conditions causing the symbol and message to be displayed persist, they are repeated every 8 Km.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 23
If the remaining range is very low, the remaining range information in Km is replaced by the message "Limited
cruising range".
MAIN screen
Pressing the MAIN button recalls the MAIN screen, from which the four screen groups SETUP, VDA, TRIP and
STATUS may be recalled.
These groups consist of the following screens:
SETUP (press UP): MENU screen;
STATUS (press DOWN): SPORT screen, SPORT 2 screen, TYRES screen (only on vehicles with TPMS);
VDA (press LEFT): Chronometer screen, Vehicle status screen, Manettino status screen;
TRIP (press RIGHT): TRIP A screen, TRIP B screen.
MENU screen
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 23
The display settings may be adjusted and vehicle parameters configured from the MENU screen (the only
screen in the SETUP group). The MENU screen may be recalled directly by pressing UP with the MAIN
screen active.
Navigation in the menu is organised into different levels:
The first level contains a list of options for setting the following parameters and displaying the following
information:
Dimming: adjust display illumination;
Display setup.: configure display;
Date/Hour: set date and time;
Language/M.U.: set language and units of measurement;
Car setup: configure vehicle parameters;
Calibr. TPMS: calibrate TPMS (only on vehicles with TPMS);
Service: scheduled maintenance information.
After selecting the function, the relevant subfunctions or modifiable parameters are displayed.
Always press UP or DOWN to select, while pressing and releasing the OK (or RIGHT) button quickly accesses
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 23
If no input is received for 10 seconds, the display returns to the first menu level.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the two TFT displays in the instrument panel may be adjusted from the specific option in the
MENU screen, or adjusted directly, with the MENU screen not currently active, or with the chronometer
stopped, if the Chronometer screen is currently active, by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons.
Pressing one of the two buttons for the first time recalls the specific screen. Pressing the buttons again adjusts
the setting.
The brightness setting may be adjusted with the vehicle in motion. Changes in the setting are effective
immediately and do no affect the brightness setting of the indicator lights on the dial.
Press OK to cancel the screen. After 5 seconds of inactivity, the screen cancels automatically and is replaced by
the previously active screen.
SPORT screen
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 7 of 23
m
The SPORT screen contains the following virtual gauges:
.co
engine coolant temperature;
engine oil temperature.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the SPORT screen
is active, the virtual indicators are displayed in minimised format.
es
SPORT 2 screen
uid
-g
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the SPORT 2
screen is active, the virtual indicators are displayed in minimised format.
TYRES screen
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 23
The TYRES screen displays a symbol of the vehicle with the pressure and temperature values for each tyre.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the TYRES screen
is active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the TRIP A or
TRIP B screens are active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 9 of 23
In addition to the chronometer function, the Vehicle Dynamic Assistance (VDA) group of screens acts as a
valuable tool for ascertaining the status of the vehicle during use on the track, allowing the driver to intuitively
determine the optimum conditions for making full use of the vehicle's performance.
The VDA group is recalled by pressing LEFT with the MAIN screen active or by pressing VDA with any screen
active and includes the “Chronometer”, “Vehicle status” and “Manettino status” screens.
The functions of the “Vehicle status” screen are only available with the Manettino driving mode selector set to
RACE, CT OFF or CST OFF mode, which have been specifically developed for track use;
With the Manettino set to Low Grip or SPORT mode, the “Vehicle status” screen is viewable, but with the
message “VDA available in Race - CT off - CST off modes”.
The “Chronometer” screen may be used to record and save lap times during track use.
The screen displays the following information:
Current Lap: time elapsed since chronometer was started;
LAP TIME / Best: best lap time;
LAP TIME / Last: last lap time;
TOP SPEED / Best: highest speed reached;
TOP SPEED / Last: top speed reached during last lap.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 10 of 23
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the “Chronometer”
screen is active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
The chronometer continues to run while the event/fault is displayed.
The chronometer is reset at each Key-on, while the most recent valid Best Lap and Last Lap values recorded
remain in memory.
The chronometer function is controlled using the OK, UP and DOWN buttons as follows:
pressing OK briefly with the chronometer stopped starts the Current Lap chronometer;
pressing OK briefly with the chronometer running resets and restarts the Current Lap chronometer and
updates information relative to the previous laps (lap end/start of next lap);
pressing UP or DOWN briefly with the chronometer stopped recalls the display brightness setting screen;
pressing UP or DOWN briefly with the chronometer running stops the chronometer and updates information
relevant to previous laps;
pressing and holding UP or DOWN with the chronometer stopped or running resets the chronometer and the
information relevant to previous laps.
During the display cycle of an active event/fault, pressing OK briefly cancels the event/fault display cycle
(“ESCAPE” function) without affecting the chronometer function.
The “Vehicle status” screen, which may be recalled directly by pressing VDA, or by pressing LEFT with the
MAIN screen active, helps the driver keep the vehicle in optimum conditions for maximum performance
during use on high grip surfaces.
This is done by using an algorithm that estimates the temperature status of the vehicle's main subsystems
(tyres, brakes, engine) in relation to a number of dynamic parameters (lateral acceleration, speed etc.).
Three different colours - green, light blue and red - are used to visualise the current vehicle status in an
immediately legible form:
WARM UP: component warm-up and control system self-acquisition stage, during which careful driving intended
to bring the vehicle into optimum operating conditions is recommended.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 11 of 23
GO: the vehicle has completed the warm-up stage and all vehicle subsystems have reached optimum conditions
for performance driving.
OVER: one or more systems overheated, creating conditions which may compromise vehicle dynamics -
slowing down is recommended in order to restore optimum operating conditions for the systems involved.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 12 of 23
The “Manettino status” screen displays a list of the parameters configurable using the Manettino driving mode
selector, indicating the relevant configuration for each parameter in each of the driving modes.
The systems involved are as follows:
F1-Trac: traction control;
E-Diff: electronic differential;
F1-DC: dual clutch F1 gearbox;
CST: stability and traction control;
ABS: anti-lock brake system;
SCM: magnetorheologically controlled suspension.
m
Electronic analogue tachometer
.co
es
uid
-g
all
The electronic rev counter is set in the centre of the instrument panel.
The numbers on the dial represent engine speed in rpm/1000.
Engine speed is indicated as main numbers at intervals of 1000 rpm, with intermediate markings at secondary
intervals of 200 rpm.
If the rev counter has a white or yellow background, the backlighting is not enabled during the daytime -
i.e. with the parking lights off, or with the parking lights on, but with the twilight sensor detecting
daytime light conditions - so as to allow instrument better visibility.
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 23
This display is set in the instrument panel and has the following functions:
vehicle speed display;
NIT information display (Infotainment Node);
"Rear Parking Camera" display (if applicable).
To interact with the system, selecting the desired configuration and setting parameters, use the controls on the
dashboard, on the right-hand side of the steering wheel.
The vehicle speed may be displayed on the right hand TFT display in either “Speedometer” or “Digital speed”
mode.
The desired display mode is selectable with the specific option in the MENU screen on the left hand TFT display.
When the vehicle is delivered, the start date of vehicle life must be stored, from which the counter begins for the
expiry date for the first "Scheduled Maintenance" service.
The parameter is entered using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
At every scheduled service date, the 'maintenance complete' procedure must be performed using the relevant
function on the DEIS diagnostic tester.
The instrument panel must store the following data:
service No. performed;
service date;
total mileage at service date.
Gearbox display
When gears are selected with the two shift paddles on the steering wheel with the DCT gearbox in MANUAL
mode (F1), the number corresponding to the currently engaged gear is shown on the gearbox display as
follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
When the DCT gearbox is used in AUTOMATIC mode, the relative gear engaged is shown on the gearbox
display as follows: D (Drive), N (Neutral), R (Reverse).
At Key-off, if the panel receives the Neutral value, the gearbox display will read N. If the panel receives a gear
engaged value for any gear other than Neutral, the display will show the gear engaged.
When the DCT gearbox is in AUTOMATIC mode, the gearbox display reads “AUTO” along with the letter
indicating the gear currently engaged.
At every Key-on, “Auto easy exit” gearbox mode is activated by the gearbox.
A small "arrow" symbol is shown continuously at the bottom left of the gearbox display.
“Parking” mode
Instrument panel All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 17 of 23
m
When the gearbox Park Lock system is activated, the gearbox display shows the letter “P” at the centre.
Performance Start
.co
es
uid
When the system receives the signal indicating that the performance start function is available, the gearbox
-g
display will show the message “PS” until key-off or until the function is enabled.
When the AVH function is activated, the message “HOLD” is shown on the gearbox display.
The function is enabled only with "manual" driving mode selected. Indication consists of a small "arrow" symbol
displayed at the top left of the gearbox display which is either fixed or flashing (3 Hz, DC 50%) depending on
the value of the signal received.
The arrow symbol appears to indicate the recommended time to upshift at the lowest speed possible
(sustainable by the vehicle in each gear) to reduce fuel consumption.
The relevant vehicle speeds for each upshift are as follows:
m
.co Tighten the indicated screw fastening the right hand
side of the instrument panel (A) to the
dashboard.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 2.6 Nm B
uid
dashboard.
all
Print Exit
They are backlit by LED lights of appropriate colours illuminating the relative surface directly.
The warning lights are only displayed when active (symbol only illuminated).
The symbols are permanently visible with light coloured instrument backgrounds.
The lights are displayed at Key-on and in the following conditions with the vehicle in motion:
Fuel
Engine oil
Coolant
Brake system
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with EPB electric parking brake warning light.
Parking brake system service required, together with brake system warning light.
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with brake system warning light (lit continuously or flashing).
Warning lights All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 6
ABS system
ASR/CST system
TPMS system
Vehicle has been driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi), or at a speed exceeding 80 Km/h (50 mph), following a
puncture to one or more RUN FLAT tyres.
m
TPMS system failure.
.co
TPMS system not active.
Alternator failure
es
Alternator failure and insufficient or excessive battery charge.
uid
External lights
-g
Airbag
Seat belts
Print Exit
The driver is notified of a fault by the instrument panel via the following events:
relevant fault warning light (if available) illuminated on instrument panel;
icon (if available) corresponding to fault displayed with relative specific message (if available) on TFT display;
The icon appears on the display simultaneously with the illumination of the warning light on the instrument panel
(if available).
All information contained in the display area reserved for messages is replaced by information concerning the
failure.
Faults are displayed according to the priority attributed to the faults themselves:
Priority 0 (very serious)
Priority 1 (serious)
Priority 2 (not serious)
In the event of multiple simultaneous faults, the faults are displayed in order, with priority 0 faults first, priority 1
faults next and priority 2 faults last.
The information relative to the faults are displayed for 5 seconds each, in "rolling" order. with the screens
displayed in rolling mode and in order of priority or occurrence of the relative fault event.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, another priority 1 or 2 fault occurs, this will replace the message currently
displayed only once the latter has been displayed for 2 seconds. The messages then continue to be
displayed in "rolling" order.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, a priority 0 fault occurs, this will replace the fault currently displayed
immediately, without waiting 2 seconds. The messages then continue to be displayed in "rolling" order.
During the display of multiple faults in rolling order, if any of the faults is interrupted by a new failure/check event
before its full display period has elapsed, the last event will be displayed nonetheless for 5 seconds, even if a
shorter period would suffice to complete its display cycle.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the set-up MENU functions, which are normally accessible via the
specific buttons, are disabled.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the display of other main screens normally accessible with the
specific DISP button is disabled.
The faults remain displayed for 20 seconds.
In the event of faults with no physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle, the
relative symbol will be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display and will remain displayed until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified.
In the event of faults with a physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle, the
relative symbol will not be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display.
Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault event will be shown again.
The fault is displayed for the period specified above at each key-on (until the malfunction generating the fault
has been rectified).
If the fault is rectified before the end of the display cycle, the message will continue to be displayed and the
relative warning light (if available) will remain lit for at least 2 seconds, to prevent undesirable "flashing"
effects.
The warning light (if available) extinguishes and the message disappears from the display simultaneously.
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 13
Schedule maintenance
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Service Stop within:" followed by the value
in “kilometres” (or “miles”) or “days” remaining until the next vehicle service interval.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area. In this case, as
there is no physical indicator light, the symbol is displayed in icon form in the specific area C1 until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified. Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault event
will be shown again.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine control system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Limp Home
The TFT display displays the specific message "Warning limited performance of the engine" together with
the message "Restart the engine".
Fuel
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Inertia switch triggered".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 13
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Fuel level low" together with information
concerning the remaining "Range" in Km (or mi).
In low remaining range conditions, the remaining range information in Km (or mi) is replaced by the
message "Limited cruising range".
The relevant message display cycle is repeated every 8 Km (5 mi).
m
Engine oil
Priority 0
.co
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Check engine oil level".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
es
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low engine oil pressure" together with the
uid
Priority 0
-g
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine oil Too Hot" together with the
message "Slow down".
Coolant
all
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine coolant Too Hot".
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 13
Catalytic converters
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temp. Excess." together with the
message "Engine performance limited".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature not plausible "
together with the message "Go to dealer slowly".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature high" together with
the message "Slow down".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
DCT gearbox
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Transmission failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
E-Diff system
Priority 1
The TFT display shows the icon and the specific message "Recovery", depending on the signal it receives.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 13
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "E-DIFF system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer", if necessary for the particular signal received.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Power steering
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Powersteering Malfunction".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Brake system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EBD system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake fluid level low" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake Pads Worn" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 13
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CCM disc brakes wear".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EPB failure only manual unlock allowed: see
handbook".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EPB is overheated see handbook".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Garage braking on".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Diagnosis activated".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking Brake system revision" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
AVH system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "AVH system failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
ABS system
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 7 of 13
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ABS system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
ASR/CST system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST on".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Suspension
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 13
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Suspension control system failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
m
.co
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Front Lift system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
TPMS system
es
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Check tyre pressure" in the event of low tyre pressure.
uid
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Do not proceed", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with normal tyres.
Priority 0
-g
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Max speed 80 Km/h", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with Run Flat tyres.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS failure".
all
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS inactive".
Priority 2
TPMS system not calibrated.
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the
message "Execute calibration".
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 9 of 13
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Calibration activated".
Electronic system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Electrical system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "System not programmed".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Battery
Priority 0
While the vehicle is connected to an external battery charger, the specific icon is displayed on the TFT display.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alternator failure".
Priority 2
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 10 of 13
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "LOGISTIC MODE ON".
External lights
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty running lights (front RH or LH -
rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Lamp Failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty turn indicators (front RH or LH -
rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Direction Indic. Failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Foglamp Failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Stop Lamp failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Numberplate Lamp Failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Adaptive Light Control failure".
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 11 of 13
Twilight sensor
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Twilight sensor failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking sensor failure" together with the
message "Warning! Possible obstacles".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction Immobilizer not
programmed".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer not programmed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alarm system failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Break-in attempted".
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones representing the open doors, luggage compartment lid and
engine compartment lid highlighted in red, and the specific message "Door open", "Doors open", "Front
bonnet open", "Rear bonnet open" or "Front and rear bonnet open".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Airbag system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag test not performed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag warning light fault".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Heated seats
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Front LH Seat Heater" / "Front RH Seat Heater".
Manettino
Indications on the TFT display All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 13
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Manettino failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Rain sensor
m
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Rain sensor failure".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
.co
Ice hazard es
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Warning: danger of ice".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Windscreen washer
uid
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low windshield washer fluid level".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
-g
all
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Windshield wiper motor failure" together with
the message "Go to dealer ".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 18
Print Exit
Horn button
Press the buttons (B) to switch the corresponding turn indicators on and off.
With the low beam headlights on, pull the switch (C) to turn on the high beam lights.
To switch the high beam lights off again, pull or push the switch (C).
With the low beam lights off, push the switch (C) to flash the high beam lights.
The high beam lights may be flashed with the low beam light off only with the ignition switch in position II.
If the high beam light switch is turned on, the high beams will come on each time the headlights switch on
automatically. Preferably turn the high beam switch off once the twilight sensor switches off the lights.
With the ignition key turned to 0 or removed, push the switch (C) within 3 minutes from switching off the engine
(or within 30 seconds if the driver side door is opened) to activate the “Follow me home” function, which
illuminates the area surrounding the vehicle to allow the occupants to walk safely in dark conditions. Each
time the switch (C) is pushed again increases the time that the low beam lights remain on in increments of 30
seconds, up to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Push and pull the switch (D) to activate and deactivate the windscreen wiper and washer.
The windscreen wiper and washer will only work with the ignition switch in position II.
The windscreen wipers have four speed settings:
OFF: windscreen wiper off;
AUTO: the rain sensor regulates the windscreen wiper frequency in relation to rain intensity;
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 18
With the windscreen wiper OFF, push and release the switch (D) quickly to set the windscreen wipers to AUTO
mode.
With the windscreen wipers OFF, pull and release the switch (D) quickly to make the windscreen wipers perform
a few, rapid wipes (instant screen clear function).
With the windscreen wipers on, push and release the switch (D) quickly to increase the windscreen wiper speed
setting in steps (from AUTO to 1 and from 1 to 2).
With the windscreen wipers on, pull and release the switch (D) quickly to reduce the windscreen wiper speed
setting in steps (from 2 to 1, from 1 to AUTO and from AUTO to OFF).
With the windscreen wipers in AUTO mode or OFF, press and hold the switch (D) to set the maximum speed (2).
With the windscreen wipers set to 1 or 2, press and hold the switch (D) to turn off the windscreen wipers.
Pull and hold the switch (D) to activate the windscreen washer. The windscreen wiper resumes operation at the
previous speed setting when the switch (D) is released.
The windscreen wiper will remain functional even in the event of electronic system malfunction.
In the event of malfunction, push the switch (D) to turn the windscreen wipers on and pull to turn off.
In the event of very severe malfunction, windscreen wiper operation may not be sustained automatically: in this
case, keep the windscreen wipers operating by pressing and holding the switch (D).
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen washer is operated with the low beam
headlights on. The headlight washer uses the same reservoir as the windscreen washer. A low fluid level is
indicated by the relative symbol on the left hand TFT display.
Press the button (E) to render the rear suspension setting independent of the Manettino control logic.
Irrespective of the current Manettino position, the suspension setting is set to Level 1 (COMFORT).
If the Manettino setting is altered after pressing the button (E), the suspension setting is determined by the
Manettino control logic.
After stopping and restarting the vehicle, the suspension setting will be determined by the Manettino position.
Manettino
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 18
The driving mode selector (Manettino) (F) on the steering wheel allows the driver to make full use of the
potential of the vehicle quickly and intuitively.
There are five different driving modes available, ordered in relation to ascending grip levels (from low to high
grip) offering progressively less driver assistance (from high to none).
Turn the Manettino (F) to select one of the five driving modes listed as follows:
Low grip / WET mode: driving mode offering maximum safety;
SPORT Mode: ideal mode for using the vehicle on an everyday basis;
RACE Mode: driving mode offering performance and stability in high grip conditions;
CT OFF Mode: F1-Trac traction control system is deactivated, whereas stability control remains active;
CST OFF / ESC OFF mode: all electronic control systems are deactivated except for the E-Diff.
In the event of a fault of any of the onboard systems, as indicated by the relative symbol on the left hand
TFT display, the Manettino enters "recovery" mode, allowing the vehicle to be driven.
CAUTION
Do not deactivate the CST system in medium or low grip conditions (wet road, ice, sand etc.).
CAUTION
With any gear higher than second gear engaged, the system automatically downshifts by one gear when the
driver switches from “Low Grip” mode to “SPORT” mode, or from “SPORT” mode to “RACE” mode.
Do not switch from “Low Grip” mode to “SPORT” mode, or from “SPORT” mode to “RACE” mode while in the
middle of a bend.
The system will not downshift automatically if doing so will cause engine speed to exceed a value or if a
downshift is already in progress due to excessively low engine speed.
m
Press the ENGINE START button (G) to start the engine.
.co
Do not keep the ENGINE START button pressed for prolonged periods.
Release the ENGINE START button (G) as soon as the engine has started.
es
Replacing the steering wheel control panel
uid
The external lights will only work with the ignition switch in position II.
Turn the external light selector clockwise or counterclockwise to select between the following external light
modes:
Turn to position (A) to switch on the parking lights.
Turn to position (B) to set the lights to automatic mode, controlled by the twilight sensor.
Turn to position (C) to switch the lights off.
Turn to position (D) to switch on the daytime running lights.
Turn to position (E) to switch on the low beam headlights.
Press the button (F) to switch the rear fog lights on and off. The rear fog lights can only be switched on and
off if the low or high beam headlights are on.
The rear fog lights may be switched on manually once the external lights have switched on in automatic mode.
When the external lights switch off automatically, the rear fog lights are also switched off automatically (if on),
and will have to switched on again manually, if required, the next time that the external lights switch on
automatically.
With the parking lights on, press the high beam light switch (G) down to turn on the running lights on the left-
hand side, and press upward to turn on the running lights on the right-hand side.
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 10 of 18
m
Refit the dashboard trim panels (
.co
E4.02).
es
Refit the lower left hand trim.
screen;
toggling between Trip Tot / Trip A / Trip B / Range, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens
SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS active;
reset Trip A / Trip B, while the relative function is flashing, by pressing and releasing quickly with the screens
TRIP A / TRIP B active;
start chronometer (if chronometer is not already running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
CHRONOMETER screen active;
start / stop chronometer (if the chronometer is running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
CHRONOMETER screen active;
confirm menu option selection, by pressing and releasing quickly with the MENU screen active;
confirm setting/modification made and go back to previous menu level (when in a submenu), by pressing and
releasing quickly with the MENU screen active;
reset Trip A (if Trip B is disabled), by pressing and holding with screens TRIP A / TRIP B active;
set Trip A to flashing mode, if Trip A information is currently displayed, by pressing and holding with any of
the screens SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS /
CHRONOMETER active;
set Trip B to flashing mode, if Trip B information is currently displayed, by pressing and holding with any of
the screens SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS /
CHRONOMETER active;
go back to the previous menu level, by pressing and holding with the MENU screen active.
The navigation dial (E) also adjusts the infotainment system volume.
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 18
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety device is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
The lever (A) engages and releases the EPB electric parking brake (by operating the brake shoes) in the
following conditions:
engine off;
ignition key in position II (Key-on);
brake pedal depressed.
The parking brake may be used as an emergency brake while the vehicle is in motion. In this case, the system
continues to apply the brakes to all four wheels until the lever (A) is released, dialoguing with the ESP
stability control system, which prevents wheel lockup.
Autohold function
Pressing the AUTO PARK (B) button, after disengaging the EPB electric parking brake as described previously
and with the ignition key turned to II (Key-on), enables and disables the Autohold function that automatically
engages the EPB electric parking brake when the ignition key is turned to 0 (Key-off).
CAUTION
When the Autohold function is deactivated, when parking the vehicle, always remember to manually engage
the electric parking brake with the relative lever before switching off the engine.
When the button (B) is pressed, the message "PARK OFF" is displayed for 5 seconds on the left hand TFT
display. The next time the button (B) is pressed, the message "PARK ON" is displayed for 5 seconds on the
left hand TFT display.
The electric parking brake ensures optimised brake release dynamics for hill starts with the Automatic Vehicle
Holding function: when certain conditions are met, the system keeps the vehicle braked by releasing the
brake shoes and callipers at different times, allowing the driver enough time to move the foot from the brake
to the accelerator without the vehicle rolling backwards.
The steering wheel reach and rake are adjustable electrically (only with the key turned to II), by pushing the
control (A) in the intended direction of adjustment for the steering wheel.
The steering wheel position is memorised, together with the external rear view mirror position, when the driver
seat position is memorised (only on vehicles with memory seats).
m
.co
es
Press the PS button (A) to activate the "Performance Start" function.
Activating this function ensures the fastest acceleration possible for the vehicle from a standing start.
The function, which cannot be selected with the Manettino set to “Low Grip” mode, transmits the optimum
amount of torque to the road surface to prevent wheelspin under acceleration.
Use the following procedure to activate the "Performance Start" function:
uid
vehicle stationary;
brake pedal depressed;
gearbox in manual mode;
select first gear;
disable traction control by setting the Manettino to CST OFF;
press the PS button (A) on the centre console panel, an audible signal warns that the function is active and
the message “PS” is shown on the gearbox display;
-g
In the event of malfunction of the “UP” and “DOWN” shift paddles, the message “Depress brake pedal and
press PS to engage gear” is shown on the left hand TFT display. The gear may then be engaged by
all
pressing the PS button (A) on the centre console while depressing the brake pedal.
In this case, the “Performance Start” function is not available.
If the gear selected previously was R, the PS button (A) must be pressed twice to engage 1st gear.
Press AUTO (C) to enable “Automatic” mode for the DCT gearbox.
The message “auto” is shown on the display when "Automatic" mode is enabled.
When in "Automatic" mode, the system automatically upshifts and downshifts in relation to vehicle speed,
engine speed and the torque/power requested by the driver.
When in "Automatic" mode, the driver may still shift manually using the UP and DOWN shift paddles.
After a manual shift, the system remains in "Automatic" mode, as indicated by the message “auto”, which
continues to be shown on the display and flashes when the driver shifts manually with the paddles.
When the vehicle is stationary, requesting "N" from 1st or "R" will not cause the gearbox to switch
from "Automatic" to "Manual" mode.
Press and hold the AUTO (C) button until the message “auto” is no longer shown on the gearbox display to exit
the DCT gearbox "Automatic" mode.
The default mode for the DCT gearbox is "Automatic".
At each engine start, the DCT gearbox will be in “Auto easy exit” unless the vehicle was last switched off with
the DCT gearbox in “Automatic” mode.
To exit “Auto easy exit” mode, simply press the AUTO (C) button on the centre console.
CAUTION
Improper use of the power windows may be dangerous.
Always ensure that all persons and objects are at a safe distance before operating.
Use particular caution when operating the driver side window in automatic mode.
The power windows may only be operated with the ignition switch in position II.
Push the button (A) up or down briefly and release to raise or lower the driver side door window manually
(partial open/close).
Pushing and holding (for more than 0.3 seconds) the button (A) down or up lowers or raises the driver side door
window completely in one-touch automatic mode, with the window stopping only once it has completed its
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 17 of 18
On/off button for “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift (optional)
Press the button (A) to activate the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift with the engine running and at
speeds below 40 Km/h.
The “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift is disabled at speeds above 40 km/h. If vehicle speed
Switches and buttons All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 18 of 18
Print Exit
m
Refitting the cabin light
.co
es
uid
Print Exit
CAUTION
Always check that the doors are closed correctly to prevent them from opening accidentally with the vehicle in
motion.
When the door is opened, the window (A) will automatically drop by approximately 2 centimetres to the target
position (1), to prevent contact with the door seal.
After the door is closed, the window (A) automatically rises to the upper limit (2).
Deactivate the alarm and unlock the centralised locking with the remote control or by turning the key in the
relative lock.
Pull the handle (A) until the lock clicks open to open the door.
Pull the handle (A) until the lock clicks open to open the door.
When the door handle (A) is pulled without opening the door, the window drops to the "target position". If the
door is then not opened within two seconds, the window returns to the "upper limit".
To open the door, release the handle and pull again.
Pulling the door handle (A) unlocks both doors
Door lock
Press the "LOCK / UNLOCK" (A) button to lock and unlock both doors from inside the passenger compartment.
The rolling lock function, which automatically locks the doors when the vehicle speed reaches 20 Km/h, may be
enabled from the “Vehicle setup” screen viewable on the left hand TFT display on the instrument panel.
Ignition switch All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
Position II (Key-on)
The left and right hand TFT displays on the instrument panel power up and the system check cycle starts.
Once the system check cycle is complete, the letter “P” (Parking) or “N” (Neutral) must be displayed.
Position 0 (Key-off)
Ignition switch All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 3
m
The key cannot be removed if the vehicle is not in Parking (the letter “P” must be shown in the gearbox
.co
display).
If the key is not removed from the ignition switch within 20 seconds from turning to position (0), the key lock
system automatically prevents the key from being removed from the ignition switch.
Should this occur, press button (A) simultaneously while removing the key from the ignition switch in order to
remove the key from the ignition switch.
Ensure that the antitheft system and any major current consumers are switched off.
Ensure that the EPB electric parking brake is engaged and the doors are closed correctly.
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
Print Exit
Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
The internal rear view mirror is electrochromic and dims automatically to reduce glare. The speed at which the
mirror dims varies in relation to the brightness of the incident light.
Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
The mirrors can fold forward or backward in the event of collision: if necessary, the mirrors may be pushed
forwards or backwards.
When reverse is engaged, the driver may adjust the passenger side rear view mirror into a different position
than the one used in normal driving to facilitate parking manoeuvres. This position may be memorised by
pressing the driving position memory buttons (E5.14, "Driving positions").
If a personalised reverse position for the rear view mirror has not been memorised, when reverse gear is
engaged, the external rear view mirror will still move slightly downwards and inwards (relative to the normal
driving position).
m
.co
After adjusting, turn the knob back (A) by 45° to the
centre position to prevent unintentionally altering
the rear view mirror setting.
es
uid
Rotate the knob (A) by 180° to fold both external rear view mirrors inwards.
m
.co
Restore new stickers (3) on the door slots.
es
uid
Screw 3.5 Nm B
Print Exit
The driver can select the gears by means of two shift paddles located behind the steering wheel.
Pull the left shift paddle DOWN to downshift.
Pull the right shift paddle UP to upshift.
Pull both shift paddles to select neutral (N).
In the event of a malfunction of the UP and DOWN shift paddles, the message “Depress brake pedal and
press LAUNCH to engage gear” is shown on the left hand TFT display. To engage the gear, press the
LAUNCH button on the centre tunnel console while depressing the brake pedal.
In the event of a malfunction of the UP and DOWN shift paddles with R engaged, press the LAUNCH button
twice to select 1st gear.
In this case, the “Launch Control” function is not available.
The switch is located on the steering column, behind the F1 gearbox shift paddles.
m
Tightening torque
Fastening steering angle sensor mounting to
steering column
.co Screw
Nm
6 Nm
Class
B
Screw 6 Nm B
-g
Print Exit
UP TO Ass.ly No. 92450, if the engine compartment lid cannot be opened with the relative release lever, the lid
lock may be opened by using the emergency release cable located behind the fuel filler flap.
FROM Ass.ly No. 92451, the emergency release cable has been eliminated.
CAUTION
Always check that the engine compartment lid is
closed correctly to prevent it from opening
accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
m
.co
Detach the retainer block (6) from the seat indicated
by the red arrow.
Detach the release cables (5) from the seat
indicated by the orange arrow.
Remove the lock (A) from the engine compartment.
es
uid
Fit the cable clamp for the release cables (5) in the
seat on the lock (A), indicated by the orange
arrow.
Fit the retainer block (6) in the seat on the lock (A),
indicated by the red arrow.
Use the last retainer ring on the retainer block (6)
as shown in the photo aside.
Close the lid and check that it remains closed after trying to force open with the hands.
Lid and fuel filler flap opening systems
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 18
The luggage compartment lid may also be opened with the ignition key removed.
If the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened with the relative release button, the lid may be opened using
the emergency release cable located under the dashboard on the driver side.
m
Closing the luggage compartment lid
CAUTION
es
Always check that the luggage compartment lid is
closed correctly to prevent it from opening
accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
locks audibly.
-g
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened with the relative release button, it may be opened by using the emergency
release cable located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
m
Closing the fuel filler flap
.co Close the fuel filler flap and press on the left hand
area until it locks audibly.
es
uid
-g
Check the correct operation of the emergency release by pulling the specific eyebolt in the engine
compartment.
Removing the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Refitting the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Lid and fuel filler flap opening systems
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 18 of 18
Print Exit
The Park Lock device is integrated in the gearbox and immobilises the vehicle to prevent involuntary movement
when the multiplate clutches are open, specifically, when the engine is off and/or with no hydraulic pressure
in the gearbox.
m
This device is activated automatically at every "Key-OFF".
.co
es
uid
-g
The mechanism consists of a retainer wheel located on the output shaft, onto which a cable-controlled ratchet
engages.
When the ratchet is over one of the teeth of the retainer wheel, the compression spring is loaded; as soon as the
vehicle begins to move, the ratchet drops between two teeth, the spring relaxes, the carriage moves and the
system locks.
When exiting park mode, carriage returns to its starting position and the compression spring retracts the ratchet
from the gap between the retainer wheel teeth.
The vehicle is equipped with a manual system for releasing the Park Lock, situated on the gearbox housing, for
use in the event of an emergency (e.g. vehicle breakdown or when transporting the vehicle with the battery
disconnected).
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety system is deactivated electronically (CAR WASH procedure), the vehicle may move
unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
The Park Lock safety device may be temporarily deactivated electronically by carrying out the CAR WASH
procedure described as follows. This procedure is necessary, for instance, when the vehicle must be moved
without turning on the engine and when using an automatic car wash.
Park Lock All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 6
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety device is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is NOT on a level surface, suitable chocks must be placed in front of or behind the wheels.
The emergency Park Lock release mechanism is situated above the gearbox and next to the engine air filter box
in the engine compartment.
Park Lock All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 4 of 6
Select the Allen key for releasing the Park Lock, p/n
261347, from the vehicle toolkit bag.
After moving the vehicle to a suitable location, REACTIVATE the Park Lock as follows.
If the Park Lock cannot be reactivated, the vehicle will function correctly but at the next key-off, the device
will not activate and the vehicle will only be held in position by the electric parking brake. As a result, the
parking brake must be engaged after stopping the vehicle.
Fit the Allen key, p/n 261347, into the relative seat
on the mechanism as indicated in the photo
aside, holding the tool at an angle in order to
reach the seat.
Park Lock All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 6
m
.co
If the electrical system is sufficiently functional, turn
the ignition switch to position "II" (Key-ON) and
check that the letter "P" is shown on the gear
indicator display instead of the letter "N".
es
uid
-g
all
Seat controls All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
CAUTION
Never adjust the seat position while driving, as this may cause loss of control of the vehicle.
Lift and hold the lever (A) and slide the seat forward or backward into the desired position.
Once in the desired position, release the lever (A) and shift the seat slightly to ensure that it has locked into
place.
- Backrest inclination
Seat controls All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 6
Turn the knob (B) clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the backrest inclination angle.
CAUTION
Never adjust the seat position while driving, as this may cause loss of control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the electric seat adjustment controls while the backrest is tipped.
After opening one of the doors with the ignition key turned to 0, the seat may still be adjusted for a limited time
(approximately 15 seconds).
The seat may be adjusted again for a brief period each time that one of the doors is opened or both of the doors
are closed with the ignition key turned to 0.
- Adjusting the backward/forward position, height and tilt angle of the seat cushion
Push the control (A) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
forward/backward position of the seat.
Push the control (A) downwards or upwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the height
or tilt angle of the seat.
Turn the control (B) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
inclination of the seat backrest.
Push the control (C) forwards, backwards, upwards or downwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control
itself, to adjust the backrest lumbar support.
Push the control (D) as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the width of the lateral backrest
and cushion sides.
Use the three buttons (E) as described as follows to memorise or recall up to three different driving positions
(function only enabled in key-on state):
to memorise a driving position setting, adjust the seat, steering wheel and external rear view mirrors as
desired using the respective controls, then press and hold any one of the three buttons (E) (each button
corresponds to one memorisable position) for at least three seconds, until a double beep is emitted
confirming that the setting has been saved. Adding a new driving position setting to the memory
automatically replaces the setting assigned previously with the same button.
to recall a memorised driving position, press the relative button (E) and release within three seconds.
Driving position selection may not be recalled while the vehicle is in motion.
The movements begin once one of the buttons (E) is released.
After releasing one of the buttons (E), if the vehicle starts to move before the seat, steering wheel and external
rear view mirrors have reached their respective memory positions, they will continue moving until the
selected positions are reached.
If the memorised longitudinal position for the passenger seat is less than 50 mm from the rear travel limit, the
seat will stop at approximately 50 mm from the rear travel limit when the memorised seat position is recalled.
The seat may then be moved beyond this point using the forward/backward adjustment control.
Pressing any of the seat adjustment control buttons or memory buttons immediately arrests the automatic
function in progress (e.g. memory recall, driver seat easy entry/exit function or rear seat easy entry function).
Turn the dial (F) to switch on the heated seat function and set the temperature.
Turning the dial to "0" switches the seat heating function off.
Do not operate the electric seat adjustment controls while the backrest is tipped.
CAUTION
m
Never adjust the seat position while driving, as this may cause loss of control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the electric seat adjustment controls while the backrest is tipped.
.co
- Backward/forward adjustment for cushion
es
uid
Lift and hold the lever (A) and slide the seat forward or backward into the desired position.
Once in the desired position, release the lever (A) and shift the seat slightly to ensure that it has locked into
place.
-g
- Backrest inclination
all
Seat controls All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 6 of 6
Turn the knob (B) clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the backrest inclination angle.
Print Exit
A - NIT
B - Amplifier (Becker)
C - Radio amplifier
D - Tweeters (Faital/Becker)
E - Twiddlers
F - Twiddlers (Becker)
G - Woofers (Faital/Becker)
H - SDARS antenna
m
.co
Refit the lid and the glove compartment ( E4.02).
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Screw 3.5 Nm B
High-power Hi-Fi
Infotainment system All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 13
Lower
Upper
Passenger side
Driver side
m
.co
Fit the new tweeter (A).
es Hand tighten the screws indicated.
uid
Print Exit
Pre-Cleaning
m
Steel. Remove rust by sandblasting, wire brush or coarse sanding paper (P16 to P80) to
achieve a bare substrate. For rust through areas tinning is recommended. In case of larger
damaged areas it might be necessary to weld in a new sheet or to replace the whole part.
Remove any remains like scale from welding, tinning or any parting compounds and fluxing
.co
agents thoroughly.
Cleaning
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
es
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders. Use a guide coat for best results:
uid
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders:
E-Coat (spare parts)
P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
File without name All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 2 of 2
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
File without name All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
The following tables show which hardeners and thinners have to be used together with the corresponding PPG
products depending on the ambient temperature.
Print Exit
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength
Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.
Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4 hours.
m
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
.co
Number of coats: 2-3
Drying times:
es
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Dry to sand at 35°C 30 - 45 minutes (D833)
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
File without name All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 9
Drying times:
Galvaplast 77
For detailed information see technical datasheet "76 - Fillers"
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Drying times:
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821 HS
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength
Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.
Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4 hours.
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Dry to sand at 35°C 30 - 45 minutes (D833)
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Drying times:
m
Through dry at 60°C
20 – 25 minutes; tinted: 30
minutes (metal temperature)
Through dry (IR) 10 - 15 min
.co
Total dry film build: 70 – 110 µm (tinted: 60 – 90 µm)
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
all
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
D104 /For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Drying times:
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
File without name All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Steel substrates, total or partly respray,
for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS /
Surfacer
HS HS HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC
Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105
Clearcoat(s)
Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
After wet sanding rinse thoroughly with clear water. Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837
DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in
force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4
hours.
Galvaplast 77
For detailed information see technical datasheet "76 - Fillers"
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
Drying times:
m
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Dry to sand at 35°C 30 - 45 minutes (D833)
.co
Total dry film build: 15 - 20 µm
Repair / Recoating: with P400 (dry), if necessary
Overcoat / Re-coat time at
at 20°C (airdrying): 30 – 40 minutes
es
Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer [Primer Surfacer]
D104 / For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
uid
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
-g
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
all
Drying times:
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, compliant (low VOC, european legislation) with sanding, for Steel
substrates, total or partly respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase
Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105
Clearcoat(s)
Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109 Deltron D8109
Cleaning
File without name All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 5 of 7
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength
Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.
Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4 hours.
Galvaplast 77
For detailed information see technical datasheet "76 - Fillers"
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Dry to sand at 35°C 30 - 45 minutes (D833)
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Drying times:
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
Restoring the cataphoresis coating
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
m
Only mix the amount necessary to restore the coating, as once mixed, the product must be used within 1
hour.
Prepare the product, mixing equal volumes of the two components (50% epoxy primer PPG Universel D831
.co
and 50% catalyst PPG Universel D832).
Clean the area to be treated thoroughly with a clean cloth soaked in R107/S.
The repair product may be applied by airbrush or with a standard brush:
Airbrush application
Dry until dust free for 5 minutes or with a hot air gun for automotive paint shops at maximum power and at a
uid
Brush application
Print Exit
Print Exit
Print Exit
Specifications
The battery is located in the passenger compartment, behind the passenger side footrest.
m
.co
es
UP TO Ass.ly No. 91559
Brand: FIAMM
Type: VR760 - 12V - 65Ah - 760A EN
uid
This location ensures optimum operating conditions for the battery and extends battery life.
Installing additional electrical devices (telephone, etc.), increases absorption and necessitates special
maintenance to ensure that the battery is charged correctly at the specified intervals.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760, a battery master switch is located in the luggage compartment, which is used to
disconnect the battery in the event of work on electrical components or prolonged periods with the vehicle
not in use.
Note that the battery has a self-discharge current of approximately 7 mA. As a result, in the event of particularly
prolonged periods with the vehicle not in use, recharge the battery at least once every months.
Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting Page 2 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the injection ECU.
These parameters must be reacquired before reusing the vehicle.
The battery is located in the passenger compartment, behind the passenger side footrest.
CAUTION
When removing a battery from a vehicle, always start
from the earth (negative) terminal when
disconnecting connections.
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the injection ECU.
These parameters must be reacquired before reusing the vehicle.
CAUTION
When installing a battery in a vehicle, always start
from the positive terminal when making
connections.
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 10 Nm B
.co CAUTION
When removing a battery from a vehicle, always start
from the earth (negative) terminal when
disconnecting connections.
es
Connect the quick release clamp to the negative
battery pole.
Fasten the quick release clamp onto the false
negative pole of the battery using the lever (C).
uid
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the ignition/injection ECU.
These parameters must be restored before the vehicle is used again, proceeding as follows.
The self-acquisition function of the Motronic ECUs will only be performed correctly at intake air temperatures
above 5 °C. Ensure that the ambient air temperature is not below this value.
Leave the engine stationary for approximately 10 minutes in the following conditions:
engine at idle speed;
water temperature stabilised;
current consumers switched off (lights, windscreen wipers etc.);
air conditioner off.
These preparations allow the ECU to optimise the self-adaptive parameters quickly by preventing irregular
engine operation.
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the injection ECU.
These parameters must be reacquired before reusing the vehicle.
Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system while the engine is running.
Before disconnecting the battery, lower the side windows by at least 2 or 3 centimetres to prevent
damage to the seals when opening and closing the doors.
If the battery is flat and the side windows are completely raised, open the door only if strictly necessary
and with the utmost caution, and do not close again afterwards, as the window will not be able to drop
automatically.
Disconnect the battery when working on current consumers or in the event of prolonged periods with the vehicle
not in use.
Disconnecting the battery with battery master switch (UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760)
Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting Page 9 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Disconnecting the battery with quick release clamp (FROM Ass.ly No. 90761)
Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting Page 10 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Each time the battery is connected to the electrical system of the vehicle, WAIT 1 MINUTE before
inserting the key in the ignition switch and do not switch on any current consumers during this period.
After inserting the ignition key, turn to "II" and WAIT AT LEAST 1 MINUTE before starting the engine.
This procedure ensures that the ECUs in the vehicle are powered up and synchronised correctly, that all
motorised valve aperture and closure travel parameters are self-acquired correctly and that AC ECU
self-acquisition is performed correctly.
These self-acquisition procedures are initiated each time the battery is connected to the vehicle.
Reconnecting the battery with battery master switch (UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760)
m
.co The battery master switch may only be
operated by Ferrari Service Network
personnel.
es
Using the specific TORX wrench, turn the battery
master switch (A) clockwise to set to ON.
uid
Reconnecting the battery with quick release clamp (FROM Ass.ly No. 90761)
Carry out the following operations before starting the engine: close the doors, the engine compartment lid and
the luggage compartment lid, unlock and lock the doors with the remote control, set the date and time on
the instrument panel, close the doors, raise the door windows to the upper limit and check that the
windows drop to the target position when the doors are opened.
If this procedure is not followed correctly, the buttons in the passenger compartment for opening the
luggage compartment lid, locking/unlocking the doors and releasing the fuel filler flap will be disabled.
Print Exit
Key-operated circuits
Start-up
Windscreen wiper and washer
Number plate lights
Stop lights
Turn indicators
Low beam/high beam/flash
Rear fog lights
Reverse lights
Side Markers (USA)
Document compartment light
Seat adjustment and comfort functions
Power windows
Injection/Ignition
Electric fuel pumps
Air conditioning and heating system
Instrument panel
Radiator cooling fan motors
Defrost windscreen, engine compartment lid window and rear view mirrors
External rear view mirror adjustment
Suspension setup control system
ABS - CST system
Exhaust temperature monitoring circuit
Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)
Front suspension lift (Front Lift) (optional)
Switch and control lighting
Airbag system
Logistic Mode Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
This is a mode in which a number of vehicle functions are inhibited or deactivated to prevent improper use of the
vehicle during transport.
After receipt of the activation signal, the specific message "Logistic mode ON" is shown in area A of the TFT
display.
Simultaneously, the “Alternator failure” light starts flashing (1 Hz - DC 50%).
"Logistic Mode" may be deactivated with the DEIS tester,
Alternator Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
F2.04 Alternator
m
The alternator is located under the intake manifold.
.co
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the engine inspection hatch ( E4.06).
Remove the ancillary belt ( A3.12).
Remove the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Print Exit
m
Undo the three screws indicated fastening the
.co
starter motor (A) to the gearbox-differential
housing flange.
Detach the starter motor (A), complete with bracket,
pulling toward the front of the vehicle.
es
uid
Print Exit
F2.06 Lamps
The following procedure is for replacing the left hand xenon low/high beam lamp.
The procedure for replacing the right hand xenon low/high beam lamp is identical.
m
Refit the luggage compartment cosmetic shields ( E4.07).
.co
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand side repeater turn indicator lamp.
The procedure for replacing the left hand side repeater turn indicator lamp is identical.
Refit the outer lens (B) onto the side repeater turn
indicator (A).
Lamps Page 6 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Prise the number plate light unit (A) out of its seat
on the bumper, applying leverage on the right-
hand side of the light, as shown in the photo
aside.
The fastener clips are on the right-hand side of the
number plate light unit.
Lamps Page 7 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Detach the number plate light unit (A) from the bulb
holder (B).
Remove the bulb from the bulb holder (B) and
replace.
Fit a new bulb in the bulb holder (B).
Fit the number plate light unit (A) onto the bulb
holder (B).
m
Fit the number plate light unit (A) into the relative
.co
seat on the rear bumper, inserting the left-hand
side first and then pushing the right-hand side up
and into place.
The fastener clips are on the right-hand side of the
number plate light unit.
es
uid
Remove the bulb (A) from the bulb holder (1) and
replace.
Insert the new bulb (A) into the bulb holder (1).
For front side marker bulbs only. Refit the front bumper ( E3.03).
For rear side marker bulbs only. Refit the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Lights Page 1 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
F2.07 Lights
The adaptive headlight system AFS2 (optional) links the angle of both the left and right front headlight beams
(low and high beam) with the steering angle for improved road illumination and to eliminate dark areas ahead
of the vehicle in bends.
The lateral angle of the headlights, which ranges from 8° toward the centre and 15° toward the exterior, is
dependent on the steering angle.
The AFS2 system also includes a “Dynamic Levelling” function, which ensures that the light beam is correctly
aimed vertically under acceleration and braking by tilting the headlights by up to 1.9° upward under braking
and up to 1° downward under acceleration.
The adaptive headlight system overrides the curve correction function at low speeds.
The procedure for removing the left hand headlight is the same.
m
Connect the connector (1).
.co
es
uid
Park the vehicle, unloaded and with the tyres inflated to the specified pressure, on a flat, level surface in front
of a shaded white screen.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand taillight unit.
The procedure for removing the rear right hand light cluster is identical.
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand taillight unit.
The procedure for refitting the rear right hand light cluster is identical.
Fit the taillight unit (A) into its seat from outside the
vehicle and fasten by tightening the three nuts
indicated.
Print Exit
m
.co
es
uid
A - Fuses on battery
-g
Fuse colour
A5_Ochre yellow
A7.5_Brown
A10_Red
A15_Light blue
A20_Yellow
A25_White
Fuses and relays Page 2 of 15
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
A30_Green
Maxi-fuse colours
A20_Yellow
A30_Green
A40_Orange
A50_Red
A60_Blue
Fuses on battery
m
.co
es
Ref Amp. Use
CAL5 CAL5 Power supply (starter motor and alternator)
uid
m
.co
es
Ref Amp. Use
F-01 60 +30 Radiator fan relay 2
F-02 30 +30 ABS (valves)
F-03 30 +30 Roof node (pump) - (not used)
uid
Print Exit
F2.09 Horn
m
.co
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Fastening horn Screw 5 Nm C
There are two horns located behind the front bumper, next to the headlights.
The procedure for removing the left hand front horn is the same.
Print Exit
Once connected to either of these sockets via the specific connector harness supplied, the DEIS diagnostic
tester can interface with and diagnose all the systems in the vehicle.
ECUs Page 1 of 24
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
F2.11 ECUs
A - ABS/ASR ECU
B - Parking sensor node
C - Parking camera ECU
D - Passenger door node ECU
E - AC system ECU
F - DCT gearbox ECU
G - Yaw node
H - Vehicle lift ECU
I - Right hand Motronic ECU
L - Eldor ECU
M - EPB ECU
N - Left hand Motronic ECU
O - Driver door node ECU
P - Body Computer node
ECUs Page 2 of 24
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Q - Airbag ECU
R - Power steering control ECU
S - Tyre pressure ECU
T - Magneride ECU
U - Adaptive headlight node ECU
V - Vent ECU
Z - Satellite antitheft system ECU (optional)
The right hand Motronic ECU is located above the right hand wheelhouse.
m
Fasten the bracket (1) complete with right hand
.co
Motronic ECU to the chassis, tightening the
screws indicated.
The left hand Motronic ECU is located above the left hand wheelhouse.
NEVER start the engine with the ELDOR ECUs disconnected: this would irreparably damage the coils
and the Motronic ECUs.
The ELDOR ionizing ECU is located behind the rear right hand wheelhouse.
The adaptive headlight ECU is located under the right hand headlight.
ECUs Page 6 of 24
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The yaw node is located under the centre console trim panel.
The DCT gearbox ECU is located under the lower right hand lateral trim panel.
m
Fastening EPB ECU to mounting bracket Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening EPB ECU mounting bracket to chassis Screw 9 Nm B
The EPB ECU is located behind the rear right hand wheel.
.co
Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
m
Fastening the reinforcement plate Screw 5 Nm B
.co
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the mats ( E4.05).
Remove the pedal mat.
If installed in vehicle
If installed in vehicle
m
.co Disconnect the connectors (2).
Replace the door node (A).
Connect the connectors (2).
es
uid
m
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Remove the dashboard trim panels ( E4.02).
Remove the lower central trim panel.
.co
UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Remove the amplifier (high-power Hi-Fi) ( E5.14).
FROM Ass.ly No. 93145. Remove the mats ( E4.05).
Remove the front tunnel mat.
Screw 9 Nm C
Print Exit
Rain sensor
The rain sensor (part of a single unit with the twilight sensor) operates in the infrared range and measures the
refraction caused by raindrops of a beam of light passing through the windscreen to automatically adjust the
windscreen wiper frequency in proportion with rain intensity.
The rain sensor is activated by selecting "AUTO" windscreen wiper mode with the relative control on the
steering wheel.
Twilight sensor
When the external lights are set to "AUTO" with the light control dial, the twilight sensor (part of a single unit with
the rain sensor) switches the low beam lights and the running lights on and off automatically. The running
lights and low beam lights are switched off by the twilight sensor (with the external light dial set to "AUTO")
according to the following logic:
low beam lights off: upon reception of the relative command from the twilight sensor;
running lights off: 10 seconds after low beam lights are switched off.
The sensitivity of the sensor may be set via the instrument panel.
Using the relative control on the steering wheel, turn the windscreen wiper from off to "AUTO".
Check that the windscreen wiper functions automatically, commanded by the rain sensor (with a dry screen,
the system will still perform a wash cycle approximately every 5 seconds).
Wet the windscreen slightly in the area over the sensor (with a spray bottle or sponge) and check that the
windscreen wiper activates and then stops when the area over the sensor is dry again.
A rain sensor fault is indicated by a specific indicator light on the instrument panel.
Place the vehicle in a brightly lit area (for example, with a halogen lamp shining directly onto the windscreen
in the area over the twilight sensor).
Turn the dial to "AUTO" and check that the lights remain off.
Cover the sensor with a black screen and check that the lights switch on with no noticeable delay.
Remove the black screen from the sensor and check that the lights switch off after a delay of a few seconds.
A twilight sensor fault is indicated by a specific indicator light on the instrument panel.
Lift the two side tabs (1) at the same time, then
remove the rain sensor (A) from its base (2) on
the windscreen.
Place the sensor (A) into a closed box or use the
special cover for the sensing area included in the
sensor package.
Print Exit
m
.co Release the engine services cable (A), undoing the
indicated screw.
es
uid
m
.co Fasten the engine services cable (A) to the
indicated clip.
es
uid
Print Exit
In preparation
In preparation
Technical specifications Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Injection - Ignition
Direct injection
Overview
Direct injection is a fuel system in which fuel is injected via one or more precisely oriented jets directly into the
combustion chamber. The injectors are located within the combustion chamber of each cylinder, so that fuel
is injected directly into the individual combustion chamber.
In conventional indirect injection systems, fuel is injected into the stream of aspirated air, before it enters the
cylinder. Single point injection systems have a single injector - even for a multi-cylinder engine - located
upstream of the point where the intake ducts branch out towards each cylinder. Multi point or PFI (Port Fuel
Injection) systems, on the other hand, have multiple injectors - one per cylinder - located in the intake
manifold, ahead of the intake valve. As a result, fuel is mixed differently - in PFI systems, mixing occurs in
the intake duct, where part of the fuel evaporates, forming a fine mixture with the air, and part of the fuel
does not evaporate, depositing instead on the inner wall of the duct creating a thin liquid layer (a
phenomenon known as wall wetting), whereas in the case of direct injection, as only air flows through the
ducts, mixing occurs directly within the combustion chamber.
Moreover, direct injection enables a stratified charge, resulting in a nonhomogeneous distribution of the fuel in
the combustion chamber; in particular, this creates a zone with a stoichiometric or slightly rich mixture zone
around the spark plug electrodes. This ensures combustion even with very lean mixtures: the air/fuel ratios -
usually indicated with the symbol α - is in these cases extremely high, around 40:1.
Stratification is controlled by a number of factors enabling the confinement of the stoichiometric zone, directing
the spray and impeding excessive diffusion throughout the chamber:
Combustion chamber geometry
Conformation of the airflow field
Injector geometry
Injection type
Stratification allows control over the engine charge by metering the quantity of fuel injected alone - as occurs in
Technical specifications Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
diesel engines (quantity regulation) - eliminating the throttle valve and, as a consequence, reducing pumping
losses. Furthermore, in low load conditions, the mixture core in which combustion propagates is surrounded
by air alone. This insulates it from the surrounding environment, reducing thermal losses.
The following is a summary of the advantages and disadvantages of direct fuel injection.
- Advantages -
Low fuel consumption and reduced emissions
High compression ratios
Improved engine flexibility and response
High power from smaller displacement engines (if used in conjunction with a turbocharger)
- Disadvantages -
More complex production process
Increased costs
More difficult, more costly repairs
The engine developed for the Ferrari California unequivocally confirms the validity of direct injection technology
in high performance applications.
Technical specifications Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The implementation of direct injection has necessitated a number of significant changes to the engine and to the
head in particular, with the adoption of high pressure pump, different injectors and, obviously, changes to the
electronic engine management. The primary components of the direct injection system are shown in the
following diagram.
m
.co
es
uid
9 - Motronic ECU
10 - Air flow sensor
11 - Intake manifold sensor
12 - RPM sensor
13 - Knock sensor
14 - Temperature sensor
15 - Timing sensor
16 - Proportional oxygen sensor
17 - Exhaust gas temperature sensor
Technical specifications Page 4 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The different subsystems forming the system can be seen in this diagram: intake, fuel supply, exhaust and
electrical circuit. On the intake side, once past the air flow meter, the air flows through the throttle valve
(unlike conventional systems, this is no longer wet by fuel). Depending on the instantaneous accelerator
pedal angle and in relation to the engine mapping, the ECU sends the necessary signal to the injector to
deliver the exact amount required. On the exhaust side, note the two oxygen sensors, one ahead of and one
after the catalytic converter. The fuel system includes a high pressure pump separating the circuit into two
parts: a high pressure section and a low pressure section.
The lubrication and cooling circuits are also of fundamental importance for the engine. The oil circuit features
wet sump lubrication, which reduces maintenance costs and times compared with the previous dry sump
configuration, and also reduces noise emissions; the oil pump is chain driven.
Fuel is injected into the combustion chamber at high pressure of up to 200 Bar. Before it is injected, the fuel
must first pass through two circuits:
a low pressure circuit, from the fuel tank to the high pressure pump (A -> B); fuel enters the pump at a
pressure of 5-6 bar;
a high pressure circuit, from the pump to the injectors (B -> C); pressure varies from 50 to 200 Bar.
Ignition coils Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
There are 8 ignition coils (4 per cylinder bank), fixed to the cylinder head covers.
Print Exit
There are four timing sensors in all, with one (internal) intake timing sensor and one (external) exhaust timing
sensor per cylinder bank.
m
Open the indicated clamps fastening the rigid
.co
secondary air system pipe (4).
Move the rigid secondary air system pipe (4) aside
so that it does not hinder the subsequent
operations.
es
uid
Connect the pipes (1), (2) and (3) onto the rigid pipe
(4).
Tighten the indicated clamps.
Connect the pipes (7) and (8) onto the rigid pipe (4).
Tighten the indicated clamp.
Print Exit
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
RPM sensor Screw 8 Nm B
.co
Located on the rear of the crankcase, near the flywheel.
Print Exit
Print Exit
Replacing the engine oil temperature sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger
Print Exit
The following procedure is for removing the left hand air flow meter.
The procedure for removing the right hand air flow meter is identical.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Motorised throttle body Page 1 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Print Exit
m
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the mats ( E4.05).
Remove the pedal mat.
Print Exit
There are two By-pass valve control solenoid valves and they are fitted in the rear side of the air filter box.
The secondary air system valve control solenoid valve is fitted in the rear side of the engine oil tank.
There are two actuator control solenoid valves and they are fixed at the bottom of the intake manifold.
Print Exit
There are two evaporative emissions control system solenoid valves, installed on the left-hand side of the
m
engine compartment, under the fuel vapour separator.
Print Exit
Working from the wheel bay, fit the heat shield (3).
If necessary, bend the heat shield (3) back into the
original shape.
Tighten the screws indicated by the black arrows.
m
Disconnect the quick connectors (2).
Disconnect the pipe (3) by removing the indicated
clamp.
Undo the indicated fasteners.
Remove and replace the vacuum accumulator tank
.co
(A).
Fasten the new vacuum accumulator tank (A),
tightening the indicated fasteners.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Nut 9 Nm B
Print Exit
Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease to variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve connectors
In the event of a variable timing adjuster solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the valve, carry out
the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease on variable timing adjuster solenoid valve connectors"
and check function again.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.
The following procedure must be performed whenever replacing a variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve
and, therefore, whenever the relative connector is disconnected.
In the event of a variable timing adjuster solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the valve, carry out
the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease on variable timing adjuster solenoid valve connectors"
and check function again.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.
Print Exit
Replacing the engine oil pressure sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger
It is mounted on the rear of the water-engine oil heat exchanger next to the oil filter.
Print Exit
System layout
m
.co
es
uid
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel will
be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with fuel, dry
the affected area immediately.
There are two rails, one per cylinder bank, mounted on the cylinder heads.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7) and
the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Cover the injector seats on the cylinder head to prevent foreign objects from entering.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Ensure that the electroinjector seats on the cylinder head are completely clean.
GDI direct injection system Page 5 of 14
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
DO NOT remove the electroinjectors from the complete rail for any reason.
Fig. 2
m
Tightening torque Nm Class
.co
Nut +1 0
23 -1 Nm
Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Removing the GDI direct injection system high pressure fuel pump
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel will
be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with fuel, dry
the affected area immediately.
There are two pumps, one per cylinder bank, mounted on the cylinder heads.
Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Perform the emergency Park Lock release procedure ( E5.12).
The Park Lock must be released as the procedure for refitting the high pressure pump entails rotating the
crankshaft manually using the torsion damper.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the intake manifold ( B4.04).
GDI direct injection system Page 8 of 14
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7) and
the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Refitting the GDI direct injection system high pressure fuel pump
m
.co Fit the cup (10) in the relevant seat, after lubricating
with engine oil.
Lubricate the O-ring seat on the pump mounting
with engine oil.
es
uid
Print Exit
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobiliser system (Ferrari CODE) which is activated
automatically when the ignition key is removed.
The keys contain an electronic device which transmits a coded signal to the Ferrari CODE ECU.
Alarm system Page 2 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The Ferrari CODE ECU only permits engine start once it has recognised the signal.
Whenever the ignition key is removed from the 0 position, the system activates the engine immobiliser.
On engine start, pressing the ENGINE START button on the steering wheel:
if the code is recognised, the CODE indicator light on the instrument panel goes out after the check cycle,
while the EOBD indicator light extinguishes at the end of the ECU diagnostic cycle, only once the engine
has effectively started: this means that the security system has recognised the key code and disabled the
engine immobiliser;
if the CODE indicator light remains lit, this means that the code has not been recognised: Should this occur,
turn the key back to 0 position and then to II position. If the engine immobiliser is still not deactivated, try
with the other key provided.
m
With the vehicle running with the ignition key turned to II position:
the CODE indicator light illuminates when the system is running a self diagnosis cycle. The next time the
vehicle is stopped, the system may be tested as follows. Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key
to 0 position, then turn the key back to II position. The CODE indicator light should illuminate and
.co
extinguish again within one second. If the indicator light remains lit, leave the key in the 0 position for more
than 30 seconds and repeat the above procedure;
the CODE indicator light flashes to indicate that the vehicle is not protected by the immobiliser system.
es
Electronic alarm
Press button (A) on the ignition key to arm the electronic alarm:
Alarm system Page 3 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Press button (B) on the ignition key to disarm the electronic alarm:
the turn indicators flash twice;
the system emits a double audible signal;
the infoled on the dashboard extinguishes;
the cabin lights and puddle lights switch on;
the vehicle central locking system is deactivated, unlocking the doors.
The alarm system is now disarmed and you may now enter the vehicle and start the engine.
To access the vehicle if the remote control key battery is flat, insert the key into either of the two door locks and
turn to unlock the door; the alarm siren will sound.
Start the vehicle normally; the alarm siren deactivates.
Alarm system Page 4 of 9
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The CODE indicator light is shown on the display when starting the vehicle to indicate that there has been an
attempted break-in.
In this case, the system indicates the cause for the alarm as follows:
LED switches off 2 times: anti-lift sensor alarm;
LED switches off 3 times: door alarm;
LED switches off 4 times: luggage compartment lid alarm;
LED switches off 5 times: ignition key alarm.
The alarm system memory is cleared when the ignition key is turned.
m
.co
Refitting the antitheft system siren
drainage.
all
Print Exit
F4.02 Airbag
The passenger airbag in the vehicle may only be deactivated by using a specific FERRARI child seat.
The specific child restraint systems have been designed to work in conjunction with the BabySmart™ automatic
child seat detection system (CPOD) for the front passenger seat of this vehicle.
The full protective function of the restraint system is only ensured if the restraint system itself is installed
and used correctly.
The specific child seats function like other child safety seats, except for the fact that they are designed to
Airbag Page 2 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
automatically deactivate the passenger airbag in vehicles equipped with the “BabySmart™ system”.
The specific child seats are equipped with two transponders, which are identified and detected by special
transmitters installed in the front passenger seat.
If the specific child restraint system is installed correctly on the front passenger seat, the transponders are
detected by the transmitters and the front passenger airbag is deactivated.
DO NOT place electronic devices (functioning laptop computers, mobile phones, cards with transponders
etc.) on the front passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with the BabySmart™ system, as signals
emitted by electronic devices may interfere with the automatic child seat detection system sensors,
resulting in system malfunctions and causing the front passenger airbag to fail to be activated and
deactivated correctly.
With the ignition key in position II and the BabySmart™ child restraint system installed on the front passenger
seat, the following conditions are possible:
if the warning light (A) is lit, the passenger airbag is deactivated;
if the warning light (A) is not lit, the passenger airbag is activated;
if the warning light (A) flashes at intervals of 6 seconds, the passenger airbag is deactivated, but only one of
the system's two transponders has been detected, meaning that the child seat is damaged or not installed
correctly.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, the specific message is temporarily displayed on the TFT display.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
CAUTION
A damaged airbag module may cause severe or fatal injuries if activated.
Airbag Page 3 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
After an accident causing airbag deployment, all the components of the system must be replaced
(including wiring harnesses and connectors).
After an accident without airbag deployment, the components of the system (including wiring harnesses
and connectors) must be checked and replaced if found to be bent, damaged or faulty.
Individual system components (including wiring harnesses and connectors) found to be damaged or
faulty must be replaced. NEVER attempt to repair a damaged or faulty component.
Airbag modules are subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals specified
in the “Warranty Card”, EVEN if the vehicle has NOT been involved in an accident.
m
If the vehicle has been stolen or the subject of an attempted theft, the components of the airbag system
must be checked.
.co
es Remove the two rubber plugs (3).
uid
CAUTION
A damaged airbag module may cause severe or fatal injuries if activated.
After an accident causing airbag deployment, all the components of the system must be replaced
(including wiring harnesses and connectors).
After an accident without airbag deployment, the components of the system (including wiring harnesses
and connectors) must be checked and replaced if found to be bent, damaged or faulty.
Individual system components (including wiring harnesses and connectors) found to be damaged or
faulty must be replaced. NEVER attempt to repair a damaged or faulty component.
Airbag modules are subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals specified
in the “Warranty Card”, EVEN if the vehicle has NOT been involved in an accident.
If the vehicle has been stolen or the subject of an attempted theft, the components of the airbag system
must be checked.
Airbag Page 5 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
CAUTION
A damaged airbag module may cause severe or fatal injuries if activated.
After an accident causing airbag deployment, all the components of the system must be replaced
(including wiring harnesses and connectors).
After an accident without airbag deployment, the components of the system (including wiring harnesses
and connectors) must be checked and replaced if found to be bent, damaged or faulty.
Individual system components (including wiring harnesses and connectors) found to be damaged or
faulty must be replaced. NEVER attempt to repair a damaged or faulty component.
Airbag modules are subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals specified
in the “Warranty Card”, EVEN if the vehicle has NOT been involved in an accident.
If the vehicle has been stolen or the subject of an attempted theft, the components of the airbag system
must be checked.
m
Tighten the screws indicated.
.co
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 4 B
Right
all
Left
Right
Left
m
Disconnect the connector (1).
Undo the indicated nut.
Remove the crash sensor (A), retrieving the screw,
washer and bracket with sheath (2), and replace.
Fit the bracket with sheath on the alignment pin of
.co
the new crash sensor (A), turned towards the
rear.
Fit the washer and the crash sensor (A), inserting
the alignment pin in the corresponding hole in
the door substructure.
Fit the screw and tighten the indicated nut.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 6.5 Nm A
uid
Print Exit
Seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point seat belts (A) with inertia lock reel and pretensioner, installed
next to the seats, on the outer side.
After adjusting the seat correctly, grip the clip (B), pull the belt slowly and insert the tongue into the buckle (C). If
the belt locks while pulling, let it rewind a little and then pull it again without jerking abruptly.
Ensure that the tongue clicks audibly into the buckle.
Position the seat belt correctly.
If the driver or passenger seat belts are not buckled, the warning lamp D lights when the ignition key is turned to
(II).
Pretensioners
This device consists of a retractor with a pyrotechnic pretensioner. The pyrotechnic system is integrated in a
single component with the retractor.
This device maximises the protective action of the seat belt.
The pretensioner is activated by the airbag control ECU in the event of a frontal collision (direction of impact
between 11 a.m. and 1 p.m.) of excessive severity, or in the event of lateral collision of sufficient severity.
The seat belt is rewound by a few centimetres immediately before the restraining action begins, taking up
any slack between the belt and the body of the occupant.
Effective activation of the pretensioner is indicated by the light on the instrument panel and by the tightening of
the belt.
Pretensioner activation releases a small quantity of powder. This powder is harmless and is not an indication of
fire.
Pretensioner activation depends only on the state of the seat belt and is not influenced by the presence of the
occupant.
If the belt is not buckled, the pretensioner is not activated even if the seat is occupied.
The seat belt is equipped with a load limiter to reduce the restraint force exerted by the belt on the body of the
occupant in the event of a collision. This device controls the force with which the seat belt is rewound during
a collision.
Operation
Seat belts Page 4 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Once activated, a pretensioner is no longer functional, cannot be repaired and must be replaced.
Replace the seat belt after a severe collision even if it does not appear damaged.
Periodically check that the anchor screws are tightly fastened and that the belt itself is in good condition and
winds and unwinds smoothly.
The belt must be kept clean; dirt may compromise the effectiveness of the retractor.
To clean the belt, hand wash with water and mild soap, rinse and allow to dry. Do not use strong detergents,
bleach or harsh solvents that could weaken the fibres.
Do not wet the retractors: water infiltration may compromise operation.
The pretensioner requires no maintenance or lubrication. If the pretensioner has been immersed in water or
Seat belts Page 5 of 6
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Safety devices
The pretensioners must be protected from exposure to temperatures of over 100 °C for more than 6 hours
m
and from sparks and naked flames.
The pretensioner may fire spontaneously at temperatures above 150 °C.
Pretensioners that have sustained knocks or falls must not be used and must be returned to the
manufacturer, specifying the reason.
Gas generators must be kept away from acids, water, grease or heavy metals to prevent the formation of
.co
toxic gases or explosive compounds.
Do not store pretensioners together with inflammable and/or combustible materials.
Never dismantle retention system components.
Never carry pretensioners by the belt, as this may cause damage.
Remove the pretensioners before carrying out repair jobs that may involve violent shocks (e.g.
bodywork/chassis repairs) and/or high temperatures (e.g. painting with temperatures above 100 °C).
Fire pretensioners before scrapping.
es
Avoid skin contact with the propellant or swallowing: wear protective gloves when handling fired
pretensioners. In the event of contact with the propellant, wash with plenty of water and seek medical
assistance.
uid
Print Exit
The inertia switch is located to the right of the battery, behind the passenger footrest.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia switch deactivates the fuel pump relays, cutting off electrical power
to the fuel pumps to prevent further loss of fuel from the fuel tank.
The switch is triggered by a steel ball which can move in a tapered seat and is held in place by the attraction of
a permanent magnet.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia of the ball overcomes the attractive force of the magnet, pushing the
ball up and out of the tapered seat, where it strikes a quick-release mechanism normally forming a closed
circuit.
When the ball strikes the mechanism, the latter changes position, opening the circuit and cutting the power to
the pumps.
Once triggered, the switch may be reset by pressing the top button (A).
CAUTION
If fuel is smelt or fuel leaks are noted from the fuel system after a mild collision, the inertia switch must not be
reset in order to prevent the risk of fire and to enable the safe identification of the cause of the problem.
Located on the right-hand side of the battery, behind the passenger side footrest.
When refitting, after connecting the inertia switch to the system, reconnect the battery and wait at least one
minute before starting the engine.
Print Exit
To assist the driver during parking, the vehicle may be equipped as an option with four sensors in the rear
m
bumper (rear parking sensors), or with four sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper
(front and rear parking sensors).
For the system to function correctly, the sensors installed on the bumpers must be kept clean and free of
mud, dirt, snow or ice at all times.
.co
When approaching obstacles located in front of or behind the vehicle, the parking sensor system informs the
driver of the distance of the obstacles via audible warning signals (which increase in frequency the closer the
obstacle is) and via visual indications in area B of the left hand TFT display. By using the visual information
provided by the system in conjunction with direct observation, the driver may avoid collisions when
manoeuvring the vehicle.
The driver is always responsible for avoiding collisions when parking and during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres. The system is only intended to offer assistance during parking by identifying obstacles
outside the driver's field of vision.
es
The parking sensors do not in any way substitute the due care and attention of the driver during
manoeuvres to avoid collision with persons or objects.
The rear parking sensors activate automatically, with the ignition key turned "II", when reverse is engaged. An
acoustic signal sounds when the rear sensors are activated to warn the driver that the system is active. On
vehicles also equipped with front parking sensors, these sensors may be activated and deactivated via a
uid
The “Stop & Go” function, available on vehicles equipped with front and rear parking sensors, automatically
activates the front sensors when the vehicle speed is equal to or less than 10 Km/h. This function offers
additional assistance to the driver in particular traffic conditions (e.g. traffic jams), indicating when the
preceding vehicle is at the minimum safe distance.
To activate/deactivate the system, recall the MENU screen, select the submenus “Car setup” and “Parking
sensor”, then select from the options “STOP&GO ON” and “STOP&GO OFF”.
Obstacle warning
The parking sensor system emits audible warning signals as soon as an obstacle is detected, which increase in
frequency the closer the obstacle is. The audible signal stops immediately if the distance to the obstacle
increases, while the frequency remains constant if the distance measured by the central sensors does not
change.
The vehicle symbol together with the zones relative to the sensors is shown on the left hand TFT display: these
zones indicate which part of the vehicle is approaching the obstacle (front or rear, right, left or centre) and the
distance between the vehicle and the obstacle (maximum, medium or minimum).
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the maximum distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in green).
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the medium distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in orange).
Park assist Page 3 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the minimum distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in red).
The symbols relative to the front of the vehicle are not displayed if the front sensors are not activated and on
vehicles not equipped with front sensors.
On vehicles with front and rear sensors, only the symbols relative to the front of the vehicle are displayed if the
rear sensors are not active. When all sensors are activated, the system is capable of indicating multiple
obstacles simultaneously: if an obstacle is detected at the maximum distance at the front centre of the
vehicle and another obstacle is detected at the minimum distance at the right hand rear of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display.
Park assist Page 4 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the parking sensor
system symbols are displayed, the symbols are shifted from the centre to the right hand area of the display,
as shown as follows.
Take particular care not to scratch or damage the sensors when cleaning; do not use dry, rough or hard cloths.
Wash the sensors with clean water, adding car shampoo if necessary. In car wash stations using steam
cleaners or high pressure water jets, clean the sensors quickly, keeping the nozzle more than 10 cm away
from the sensors.
Work to repaint the bumpers or touch up the paintwork in areas near the sensors must only be done by the
Ferrari Service Network. Incorrectly applied paint may compromise the function of the parking sensors.
The system ECU checks all components each time reverse is engaged. In the event of a malfunction of one or
more parking sensor, the specific symbol together with the message “Parking sensor failure. Warning!
Possible obstacles” are shown on the left hand TFT display, accompanied by an audible warning signal.
Park assist Page 5 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The sensors are capable of detecting obstacles with sufficiently large and regularly shaped surfaces
(e.g.: poles with a diameter of more than 60 mm, walls, barriers and trees). Obstacles with protrusions
or with irregular surfaces may not be detected correctly.
In certain conditions, objects close to the rear of the vehicle may not be detected by the system and, as a
result, may cause damage to or be damaged by the vehicle.
The signals generated by the sensors may be altered by damage to the sensors themselves, dirt, snow
or ice accumulated on the sensors or by ultrasonic disturbance (e.g. pneumatic brake systems on
trucks or pneumatic drills) in the vicinity.
The driver is always responsible for avoiding collisions when parking and during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres. The system is only intended to offer assistance during parking and when operating the
roof by identifying obstacles outside the driver's field of vision.
The parking sensors do not in any way substitute the due care and attention of the driver during
manoeuvres to avoid collision with persons or objects.
m
Fastening the buzzer Screw 5 Nm C
.co
Remove the rear oddments storage compartment cover only.
Screw 5 Nm C
Print Exit
System overview
The air conditioning and heating system in the California automatically regulates the temperature and humidity
in the passenger compartment. The system can simultaneously and independently regulate air temperature
and distribution for the driver side zone and passenger side zone.
The AC system consists of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning unit (HVAC) located under the dashboard.
Functional requisites
The functions of the HVAC module, located under the dashboard, consist in aspirating air through heat
exchanger either from outside the vehicle or from inside (REC function) and in continuously adjusting the
quantity and temperature of the distributed air.
The air introduced into the vehicle must be filtered to remove particulate and odours in both external air and
REC modes.
The air temperature is regulated by altering the flow of refrigerant through the heater core in two symmetrical
crossed circuits, with one on the left hand side and one on the right hand side.
AC system layout Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Automatic mode
Press the button (A) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) automatic mode for the air conditioning in the
driver zone.
Press the button (B) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) automatic mode for the air conditioning in the
passenger zone.
In automatic mode, the system automatically adjusts air flow, distribution and temperature to maintain the set
temperature value.
In partial automatic mode, certain parameters may be adjusted manually while others are regulated
automatically.
In manual mode, the user may adjust all parameters as desired.
Temperature setting
A.C. controls - A.C. control panel Page 2 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Turn the dial (C) clockwise to increase air temperature in the driver zone.
Turn the dial (C) counterclockwise to decrease air temperature in the driver zone.
Turn the dial (C) clockwise to increase air temperature in the passenger zone.
Turn the dial (C) counterclockwise to decrease air temperature in the passenger zone.
Turn the dial (E) clockwise or counterclockwise to select one from the six air distribution modes available for the
driver zone.
Turn the dial (F) clockwise or counterclockwise to select from the six air distribution modes available for the
m
passenger zone.
Fan speed
.co
Turn the dial (G) clockwise to increase air flow.
Turn the dial (G) counterclockwise to reduce air flow and turn air flow off.
AC compressor on/off
Press the button (H) to switch the AC compressor on (LED on) and off (LED off).
es
Enable/disable single-zone operation
Press the button (L) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) single-zone operation.
uid
Press the button (M) to switch the rear screen demist/defrost function on (LED on) and off (LED off).
-g
Press the button (N) to switch the windscreen demist/defrost function on (LED on) and off (LED off).
all
Press the button (P) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) the air recirculation function.
With external temperatures above 32°C, the air recirculation function is always active, with 60 second pauses
every 20 minutes to refresh the air.
When the windscreen washer function is active, the recirculation function is activated for 20 seconds to prevent
the smell of detergent from entering the passenger compartment.
The recirculation function makes the air in the passenger compartment heat up or cool down more quickly.
A.C. controls - A.C. control panel Page 3 of 4
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
The NCL ECU for the air conditioning and heating system is integrated in the A.C. control panel.
Prise the A.C. control panel (A) out of its seat with a
suitable tool.
Print Exit
F5.03 Compressor
If compressor replacement is necessary, drain the oil from the compressor via the relative threaded plug (on
the cylindrical body) and measure the quantity retrieved. The new compressor must be drained with the
same procedure and then filled with the same quantity of fluid drained from the previous component
before installation in the vehicle.
When installing a new compressor, the oil must first be drained from the compressor via the threaded plug
(on the cylindrical body) and the new compressor must be filled with same quantity of oil retrieved from the
replaced compressor before installation in the vehicle.
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Condenser Page 1 of 5
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
F5.04 Condenser
New solution
New solution
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
Pressure switch Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
Print Exit
The dehydrator filter is located on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment, underneath the windscreen
wiper motor linkage.
Undo the screws (1) fastening the pipes (2) onto the
dehydrator filter (A).
Mark the position of the dehydrator filter (A) relative
to the mounting bracket (3), to ensure that the
new filter is installed at the same height.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the dehydrator
filter (A) to the mounting bracket (3).
Widen the mounting bracket (3) and lift out the
dehydrator filter (A).
Dehydrator filter Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co Undo the two indicated screws.
Remove the expansion valve (A) and replace.
es
uid
Print Exit
m
.co Undo the indicated screw.
Remove the upper passenger side air duct (E).
es
uid
Working with due caution, remove the AC unit from the dashboard substructure, easing out from behind.
This operation requires at least two operators.
A.C. unit Page 7 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Working with due caution, fit the AC unit in the relative seat in the dashboard substructure, installing from
behind.
In the event of replacing the dashboard substructure, fit seal strips as per original installation to prevent
interference with the AC unit.
m
.co Tighten the screws indicated.
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
Screw 8.5 Nm B
uid
Screw 8 Nm B
A.C. unit Page 10 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Refit.
TGK proportional valves Page 1 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Print Exit
m
.co
es
Tightening torque Nm Class
uid
The TGK proportional valves are located inside the luggage compartment, behind the luggage compartment tub.
Check that the two drip baffle rings (8) are correctly
installed on the pipes (1).
Print Exit
The recirculation pump is located behind the luggage compartment tub, in front of the steering box.
Print Exit
F5.11 Sensors
m
.co
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the steering column trim panel ( E4.02).
Remove the lower element of the steering column trim panel only.
Print Exit
The air conditioning and heating system may be discharged with the special tool for recovering refrigerant gas.
If the function is available on the tool, measure the quantity of fluid emptied from the system to enable
subsequent refilling with the correct amount.
When replacing a component, drain all the oil from the removed components and refill the new component
with the same quantity.
Discharging and charging the system Page 2 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
CAUTION
Discharging refrigerant gas near open flame is
extremely dangerous and may result in the
emission of toxic gas (phosgene).
CAUTION
Do not use open flames to search for refrigerant
leaks, as this may generate toxic gas (phosgene).
After discharging the system, attach the special tool to the system discharge/recharge unions and recharge
the system.
If some of the compressor oil has remained trapped in the machine after the discharging procedure, top up
the system with the same quantity of the specified oil.
When replacing a component, the new component must be topped up with the same amount of oil removed.
When the charging procedure is complete, let the system run for about 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes of operation at MAX cooling level, the following conditions must be met:
- ambient temperature: 20 - 22°C;
- relative low pressure: 2.0 bar;
- relative high pressure: 13.5 bar;
- output air temperature (average measured at the vents): 8 - 13 °C.
Discharging and charging the system Page 3 of 3
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
CAUTION
Discharging refrigerant gas near open flame is
extremely dangerous and may result in the
emission of toxic gas (phosgene).
m
Refit the caps (3) on the discharge/charge pipes.
.co
es
uid
Functional Diagrams
FD00 - Fuel supply system and earths
Symbol Code Description Assembly No.
FD0001 Fuel supply distribution
FD0426 Buzzers
FD0505 Immobilizer
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
C001-F Battery ECU (CBA) C02601_0
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-E Battery ECU (CBA) C02801_0
C001-B Battery ECU (CBA) C53111_0
C001-C Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
.co
C001-D Battery ECU (CBA) C02901_0
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
D313-B Battery master switch C01001_0
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C010-A Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C02901_0
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 3 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-C Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
.co
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 8 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 11 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 12 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 13 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
.co
es
uid
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 20 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 21 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
C001-D Battery ECU (CBA) C02901_0
C312 Supplementary relay ECU 2 (CS-SCM 2) C31112_2
C012 Supplementary fuse and relay ECU (CS-SCM) C31112_2
D002-B Ignition switch C20012_0
D002-A Ignition switch C31112_2
.co
E312 Suspension control node (NCS) C31112_2
E131 DC/DC converter - front 1 C31112_2
G003-B Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side C31112_1
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 23 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 28 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 29 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C31112_2
.co
E004-V Body computer node (NBC) C31112_2
Junction between front wiring and passenger
X003 C31112_2
compartment cable / dashboard cable
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 33 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 36 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 37 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 38 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C31112_2
.co
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 43 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 44 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 45 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C003-L Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
C003-O Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
C019-A Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
C019-B Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
.co
E004-N Body computer node (NBC) C21214_2
Junction between passenger compartment cable and
Y008 rear wiring / front wiring and passenger C21214_2
compartment cable
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 48 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 50 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 51 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
m
Junction between passenger compartment cable
X115-A and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable C21214_2
and rear wiring
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C31112_2
C012 Supplementary fuse and relay ECU (CS-SCM) C31112_2
.co
C313 Supplementary relay ECU 3 (CS-SCM 3) C21214_2
D002-A Ignition switch C31112_2
E131 DC/DC converter - front 1 C31112_2
es
uid
-g
all
PDF All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com Page 53 of 56
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
PDF Page 1 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
m
G029-B Engine cooling electric fan's earth C31112_1
G012 Battery frame ground C01001_0
G022 Dashboard area earth - right-hand side C20012_0
G043 Amplifier earth C20012_0
.co
G024 Airbag system earth C20012_0
G001-A Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side C31112_1
G001-B Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side C31112_1
G005 Braking system earth C31112_1
G009 Earth on engine cooling radiator electric fan C31112_1
G021 Dashboard area earth - left-hand side C21214_2
G105 Air pump earth C21214_2
G070 Fuel tank earth - left-hand side C21214_1
es
Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand
G056 C21214_1
side
G080 Head cover earth - left hand cylinder bank C11011_0
G041-A Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G002 Earth on engine for battery C06001_0
G008 Earth on chassis for engine C06001_0
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
G041-A Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G042-A Rear light area earth - right-hand side C21214_1
G042-B Rear light area earth - right-hand side C21214_1
.co
G045 Earth for parking brake ECU C21214_1
Earth on chassis for injection system - right-hand
G054 C21214_1
side
Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand
G056 C21214_1
side
G060 Fuel tank earth C21214_1
G061 Fuel filler neck earth C21214_1
G070 Fuel tank earth - left-hand side C21214_1
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 12 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 13 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 14 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 15 of 16
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
m
Junction between passenger compartment cable
X002 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side door cable
Junction between passenger side door cable /
Y002 C25002_0
passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
E022-C Passenger's door node (NPP) C25002_0
E008-A Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL) C31112_2
.co
E304 Tyre pressure node (NTP) C31112_2
E073-B Airbag node (NAB) C20012_0
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
E004-V Body computer node (NBC) C31112_2
E004-D Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-Y Body computer node (NBC) CA0101_0
es
E004-F Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E003-A Control panel (NQS) C20012_0
Junction between passenger compartment cable
X022 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side seat cable
E041-C Parking sensor node (NSP) C21214_2
Junction between passenger compartment cable
X001 C21214_2
and rear wiring / driver side door cable
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
D412-A Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU C20012_0
E003-A Control panel (NQS) C20012_0
.co
E004-D Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-F Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E073-B Airbag node (NAB) C20012_0
E410 Information repetition node (CAN BOX) C20012_0
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
E302 Lift system ECU C53111_0
Junction between lift system cable / passenger
Y090 C53111_0
compartment cable and rear wiring
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 12 of 13
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C003-M Dashboard ECU (CPL) C20012_0
D020 External light switch (CLE) C20012_0
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
.co
E004-D Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-F Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
Junction between dashboard cable / front wiring
Y003 C20012_0
and passenger compartment cable
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
E004-N Body computer node (NBC) C21214_2
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 7
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
D020 External light switch (CLE) C20012_0
C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
E004-Y Body computer node (NBC) CA0101_0
C003-X Dashboard ECU (CPL) CA0101_0
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
.co
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C31112_2
G022 Dashboard area earth - right-hand side C20012_0
I061 Front headlight unit - left-hand side C31112_1
G001-B Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side C31112_1
I062 Front headlight unit - right-hand side C31112_1
Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand
G003-B C31112_1
side
es
Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand
G003-A C31112_1
side
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 12 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 13 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 14 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 15 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 16 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 17 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
INT from F-35 for high beam, headlight washer and NCL
18
relay coils
19 INT from F-35 for lift system
20 CPL earth path
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 18 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 19 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 20 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 21 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
18 _
19 Power supply from F-48
20 Power supply from F-47
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 22 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 23 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 24 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 25 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 26 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 27 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
33 Earth for relay T30 coil (85) for air pump
34 +30 for T02 (30) from F-14 high beams
35 Power supply from T02 (87) for high beams
36 INT input from F-35 for T02 relay coil (86) for high beams
Negative signal for relay T02 coil (85) for high beams from
37
.co
NPL
38 +30 for T03 (30) from F18
39 Power from T03 (87) for controlling fuel pump 2nd speed
40 Input from F24 for T03 relay coil (86)
41 Negative signal for T03 relay coil (85) from RH NCM
42 +30 from F18 for T09 main relay coil (86) 1
Negative signal for T09 IE system relay coil (85) from LH
43
NCM
es
44 Earth for relay T08 coil (85) for AC system
45 Input from F-24 for T08 relay coil (86) for AC system
46 Earth for relay T31 coil (85) for headlight washer
INT input from F-37 for T31 relay coil (86) for headlight
47
washer
48 30 T17 relay from 15/54
49 _
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 28 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NCM
77 Power supply output from T17 (87a) INT/A for CPL
78 Power output from T19 (87a) (predisposition)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 29 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
1 Earth
2 Negative signal for running light control
3 _
4 Negative signal from rear fog light control light
5 Negative signal for low beam control
6 +15 for control symbol backlight power
7 Negative signal for parking light control
8 _
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 30 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
D072 - Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO) (clock spring)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 31 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 32 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
1 _
Negative signal for position lights control from external
2
light switch
3 +30 from F-53 for NQS
-g
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 33 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 34 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 35 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 36 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 37 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
4 _
5 LH side direction indicator light activation
6 Input from hyper-frequency
7 Immobilizer aerial
8 Immobilizer aerial
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 38 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
22 _
23 Input from anti-tilt
Negative signal from brake fluid low level indicator switch
24
(NO with full pan)
25 Positive signal for D+ alternator
26 K-Line for NCM diagnosis
27 _
28 _
Negative control for 2nd speed windscreen wiper motor
29
power supply relay
30 Aerial for RF receiver (earth)
31 RHS direction indicator light activation
Negative signal from LH/RH front/rear brake pad wear
32
sensors
Negative signal from NA front lid incompletely closed
33 indicator switch (switch electrically closed with front lid
open)
34 Serial A-bus line on front cable for CSA
35 B-CAN A for NTP/NCL
36 B-CAN B for NTP/NCL
Speedometer signal repeater for vehicle dynamic signal
37
socket (used by numerous acquisition systems)
38 _
39 Actuation for front RH position light
Negative control for 1st speed windscreen wiper motor
40
power supply relay
41 Signal from external battery charger
42 Front lid open signal from button on centre console
43 Aerial for RF receiver
44 C-CAN L
45 C-CAN H
46 +30 from F-39 for alarm system siren
47 Line-K for front zone for NFR, CSG
48 C-CAN L
49 C-CAN H
50 Actuation for front LH direction indicators light
51 Actuation for front RH direction indicators light
52 Actuation for front LH position light
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 39 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 40 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
1 Earth
2 Turn indicator signal
3 Turn indicator signal
4 Power for DRL/POS and turn indicator
5 High beam command
6 Turn indicator lamp diagnostic signal
7 Low beam
8 Earth (litronic)
9 DRL activation
10 Running light lamp diagnostic signal
11 LIT COM
12 INT (+15) (key on)
13 CAN H
14 CAN L
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 41 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
1 Earth
2 Turn indicator signal
3 Turn indicator signal
4 Power for DRL/POS and turn indicator
5 High beam command
6 Turn indicator lamp diagnostic signal
7 Low beam
8 Earth (litronic)
9 DRL activation
10 Running light lamp diagnostic signal
11 LIT COM
12 INT (+15) (key on)
13 CAN H
14 CAN L
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
Code Description Cavo
C003-M Dashboard ECU (CPL) C20012_0
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
E004-D Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
.co
E004-G Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
G022 Dashboard area earth - right-hand side C20012_0
Junction between dashboard cable / passenger
X017-A C20012_0
compartment cable and rear wiring
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 12
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 1 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
C003-L Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
C003-O Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
C019-A Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
C019-B Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
.co
E042-A Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR) C21214_2
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 8 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 9 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 10 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 11 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
INT from F-35 for high beam, headlight washer and NCL
18
relay coils
19 INT from F-35 for lift system
20 CPL earth path
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 12 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 13 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 14 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
-g
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 15 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
18 _
19 Power supply from F-48
20 Power supply from F-47
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 16 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 17 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 18 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 19 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 20 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 21 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 22 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
NCM
77 Power supply output from T17 (87a) INT/A for CPL
78 Power output from T19 (87a) (predisposition)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 23 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 24 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
34 Coil 86, microrelay T25 from F-63
35 Contact 87, microrelay T25 to NCR, relay coil T22
36 Contact 30, microrelay T25 from F-63
37 Coil 85, microrelay T22 from NCR
38 Contact 87a, microrelay T22
.co
39 Coil 86, microrelay T22 from 87 T25
40 Contact 87, microrelay T22 for F59
41 Contact 87, microrelay T23 for F-64
42 Coil 86, microrelay T23 (+30 F-39)
43 Contact 87a, microrelay T23
Coil 85, microrelay T23 from NBC, dependent on fuel filler
44
flap button
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 25 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 26 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 27 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
1 _
Negative signal for position lights control from external
2
light switch
3 +30 from F-53 for NQS
Negative signal for low beams control from external light
4
switch
5 B-CAN A for NQS
6 B-CAN B for NQS
7 _
8 Earth for CLE
9 _
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 28 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 29 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
10 _
11 _
12 K-Line for front zone, NFR (connection with Z47)
13 Line-K for NTV (connected to LN24)
14 C-CAN Low for diagnostics
15 _
+30 EOBD diagnostic socket from F-39 (connection with
16
Y17)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 30 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 31 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 32 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 33 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
22 _
23 Input from anti-tilt
Negative signal from brake fluid low level indicator switch
24
(NO with full pan)
25 Positive signal for D+ alternator
26 K-Line for NCM diagnosis
27 _
28 _
Negative control for 2nd speed windscreen wiper motor
29
power supply relay
30 Aerial for RF receiver (earth)
31 RHS direction indicator light activation
Negative signal from LH/RH front/rear brake pad wear
32
sensors
Negative signal from NA front lid incompletely closed
33 indicator switch (switch electrically closed with front lid
open)
34 Serial A-bus line on front cable for CSA
35 B-CAN A for NTP/NCL
36 B-CAN B for NTP/NCL
Speedometer signal repeater for vehicle dynamic signal
37
socket (used by numerous acquisition systems)
38 _
39 Actuation for front RH position light
Negative control for 1st speed windscreen wiper motor
40
power supply relay
41 Signal from external battery charger
42 Front lid open signal from button on centre console
43 Aerial for RF receiver
44 C-CAN L
45 C-CAN H
46 +30 from F-39 for alarm system siren
47 Line-K for front zone for NFR, CSG
48 C-CAN L
49 C-CAN H
50 Actuation for front LH direction indicators light
51 Actuation for front RH direction indicators light
52 Actuation for front LH position light
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 34 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
m
.co
es
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 35 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 36 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 37 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 38 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
82 _
83 CAN 2 high (for development/tuning)
84 Wake-up 1 (ignition switch)
85 TIP +/- redundant
86 TIP +
87 Launch/Winter
88 Rev button
89 Transmission failure warning light
90 CAN 1 high
91 CAN 2 low (for development/tuning)
92 CAN 1 low
93 Forward/Reverse lever (not connected)
94 TIP -
95 Forward/Reverse lever redundant (not connected)
96 Key switch redundant (not connected)
97 Auto/Manual
98 _
99 GND for ren button/CAN Ground
100 Ground for Paddles
101 Ground for Lever (not connected)
102 Reverse Drive Relay (RevDriveRly)
103 Failure signal (positive from start button)
104 CAN earth
105 Brake switch
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 39 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
106 _
107 _
108 _
109 FWD Drive LED (not connected)
110 Engine starter relay
111 Keylock solenoid
112 Cooler fan
113 Main relay
114 _
115 _
116 Logic battery power (permanent)
117 Battery earth
118 Battery earth
m
119 Solenoid power (switched by master relay)
120 _
121 _
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 40 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
1 Stop light
2 Rear fog/running lights
3 Turn indicator light
5 Reverse light
6 Earth
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 41 of 42
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
1 Stop light
2 Rear fog/running lights
3 Turn indicator light
5 Reverse light
6 Earth
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 3 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 4 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
m
Code Description Cavo
D020 External light switch (CLE) C20012_0
E004-F Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-G Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 5 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 6 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 7 of 8
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Wiring Index
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cables.htm 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
D313-B Battery master switch
G012 Battery frame ground
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
C001-F Battery ECU (CBA)
C036 Connection to battery positive (emergency start)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
B301-A Branch terminal board
C001-E Battery ECU (CBA)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
C001-D Battery ECU (CBA)
C010-A Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
B002-B Alternator with integrated adjuster
B301-C Branch terminal board
C066-B Power multiplication
M020-B 12V starter motor
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
G002 Earth on engine for battery
G008 Earth on chassis for engine
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
B002-A Alternator with integrated adjuster
E129-A Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side
E300-B Ionising ECU (ION)
G055 Earth on engine - left-hand side
G080 Head cover earth - left hand cylinder bank
L009 Electro-injector - cylinder 5
L010 Electro-injector - cylinder 6
L053 Coil - cylinder 5
L054 Coil - cylinder 6
L148 Coil - cylinder 7
L149 Coil - cylinder 8
L150 Electro-injector - cylinder 7
L151 Electro-injector - cylinder 8
L153 Intake camshaft timing adjuster - left-hand main bearings
L155 Exhaust camshaft timing adjuster - left-hand main bearings
L157 Intake timing sensor - left-hand main bearings
L159 Exhaust timing sensor - left-hand main bearings
M020-A 12V starter motor
M025-A A.C. compressor
M025-B A.C. compressor
M111 Motorised throttle valve - left-hand main bearings
S073 Oxygen sensor - ahead of catalytic converter - left-hand main bearings
S108 Direct injection pump (GDI ) - left-hand main bearings
S309 Fuel pressure sensor - left-hand main bearings
X304 Junction between left hand cylinder bank injection cable / right hand cylinder bank injection cable
Y058-A Left hand cylinder bank injection / intake manifold (valves) cable junction
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Y058-B Left hand cylinder bank injection / intake manifold (valves) cable junction
Y303 Junction between left hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z080 Air flow meter - left-hand main bearings
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
L160 Intake manifold valve - 2
L161 Intake manifold valve - 1
X058-B Junction between intake manifold cable (valves) / left hand cylinder bank injection cable
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
L162 Compensator butterfly valve sensor (intake manifold position) - 1
L163 Compensator butterfly valve sensor (intake manifold position) - 2
X058-A Junction between intake manifold cable (valves) / left hand cylinder bank injection cable
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION)
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Y302-B Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y302-C Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y304 Right hand cylinder bank injection / left hand cylinder bank injection cable junction
Z002 Air flow meter - right-hand main bearings
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION)
G007 Earth on engine - right-hand side
G053 Earth on engine - right-hand side
G081 Head cover earth
L001 Electro-injector - cylinder 1
L002 Electro-injector - cylinder 2
L003 Electro-injector - cylinder 3
L004 Electro-injector - cylinder 4
L005 Coil - cylinder 1
L006 Coil - cylinder 2
L031 Coil - cylinder 3
L032 Coil - cylinder 4
L152 Intake camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L154 Exhaust camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L156 Intake timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L158 Exhaust timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L300 Secondary air solenoid valve
M026 Motor-driven throttle - right-hand main bearings
S014 Engine coolant temperature sensor
S036 Engine oil pressure sensor
S051 Fuel pressure sensor - left-hand main bearings
S060 Engine oil temperature sensor
S071 Oxygen sensor - ahead of catalytic converter - right-hand main bearings
S107 Direct injection pump (GDI ) - right-hand main bearings
S114 RPM sensor
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Y302-B Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y302-C Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y304 Right hand cylinder bank injection / left hand cylinder bank injection cable junction
Z002 Air flow meter - right-hand main bearings
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
C003-M Dashboard ECU (CPL)
D002-B Ignition switch
D018 Electric rear-view mirror control
D020 External light switch (CLE)
D024 Glove compartment light button
D058 Steering column adjustment control
D072 Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO) (clock spring)
D073 Handbrake switch
D100 ICP dial (Instrument Control Panel)
D101 TFT control
D301 Gear shift paddle selector
D412-A Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU
D412-B Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU
E003-A Control panel (NQS)
E003-B Control panel (NQS)
E003-C Control panel (NQS)
E003-D Control panel (NQS)
E004-D Body computer node (NBC)
E004-F Body computer node (NBC)
E004-G Body computer node (NBC)
E013-A HI-FI system amplifier (DSP)
E013-B HI-FI system amplifier (DSP)
E040-A Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-B Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-D Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-E Info-telematic node (NIT)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
L065 Tweeter - passenger side
L111 Front parking sensor buzzer
M032-A Axial steering column movement motor
M032-B Axial steering column movement motor
.co
M034-A Vertical steering column movement motor
M034-B Vertical steering column movement motor
M090 Air vent actuator - 1
M091 Air vent actuator - 2
M092 Air vent actuator - 3
M093 Air vent actuator - 4
S021 Radio antenna
es
X017-A Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
X017-B Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
X019 Dashboard / Airbag - passenger side cable junction
X066-A Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
X066-B Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
uid
X066-C Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
X134 Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (red RCA)
X333 Dashboard/glove compartment joint
X356 Microphone power supply (phantompower interface)
Y003 Junction between dashboard cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Y007 Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
-g
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
E006-B Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E082 Electric parking brake node
E129-B Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side
G041-A Rear light area earth - left-hand side
G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side
G042-A Rear light area earth - right-hand side
G042-B Rear light area earth - right-hand side
G045 Earth for parking brake ECU
G054 Earth on chassis for injection system - right-hand side
G056 Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand side
G060 Fuel tank earth
G061 Fuel filler neck earth
G070 Fuel tank earth - left-hand side
H011 Heated rear window
I007 Taillight - left-hand side
I008 Taillight - right-hand side
I011 Supplementary stop light
L007 Anti-evaporative emission system safety solenoid valve - right-hand main bearings
L027 Rear shock absorber - left-hand side
L028 Rear shock absorber - right-hand side
L200 Evaporative emissions control system safety solenoid valve - left-hand main bearings
L302 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve
L303 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve - left-hand side
L304 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve - right-hand side
M049 Fuel tank filler cap door actuator
M064 Gearbox oil cooling electric fan
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
C003-L Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C003-O Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C019-A Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
C019-B Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
C311 Battery charger joint
C313 Supplementary relay ECU 3 (CS-SCM 3)
D060 Hazard lights control
D068 Accelerator pedal sensor
D200 Lift system button
D300 DCT gearbox control panel
D312 Glove compartment button
D400 Luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release controls
D405 Button for RHT roof and power windows
E004-N Body computer node (NBC)
E018 Parking camera ECU
E041-A Parking sensor node (NSP)
E041-B Parking sensor node (NSP)
E041-C Parking sensor node (NSP)
E042-A Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
E042-B Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
E073-A Airbag node (NAB)
E088 Japan' navigator node
E409 Anti-lifting sensor (CAS)
G021 Dashboard area earth - left-hand side
G105 Air pump earth
I025-A Front ceiling light (PAC)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
D308 External door handle switch - driver's side
D314 Internal door handle switch - driver's side
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
D309 External door handle switch - passenger's side
D315 Internal door handle switch - passenger's side
E022-A Passenger's door node (NPP)
E022-B Passenger's door node (NPP)
E022-C Passenger's door node (NPP)
E406 Master hyper frequency alarm system sensor (CSI master)
I020 Step light - passenger's side
L064-A Door woofer - passenger's side
L064-B Door woofer - passenger's side
L138 Mid range speaker - passenger side door
M005 Door lock actuator - passenger's side
M009-A External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M009-B External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M009-C External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M011 Power window motor - passenger's side
S030 Window position microswitch - passenger's side
S121 Crash sensor on door - passenger side
X231 Junction between passenger side door cable / curtain airbag cable
Y002 Junction between passenger side door cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
D033 Luggage compartment lid electric lock switch
E001 Alarm system siren ECU (CSA)
E029 NFA ECU (adaptive headlights node)
G001-A Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side
G001-B Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side
G003-A Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side
G003-B Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side
G005 Braking system earth
G009 Earth on engine cooling radiator electric fan
G012-A Battery frame ground
G029-A Engine cooling electric fan's earth
G029-B Engine cooling electric fan's earth
I005 Front side direction indicator - left-hand side
I006 Front side direction indicator - right-hand side
I013 Luggage compartment ceiling light
I061 Front headlight unit - left-hand side
I062 Front headlight unit - right-hand side
I302 RH rear side marker
L020 Horn
L021 Horn - low
L025 Front shock absorber - left-hand side
L026 Front shock absorber - right-hand side
L030 Servodriving solenoid valve
M012 Windscreen wiper
M015 Windscreen washer electric pump
M016 Headlight washer electric pump
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
B001-A Battery
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA)
C001-C Battery ECU (CBA)
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA)
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM)
C012 Supplementary fuse and relay ECU (CS-SCM)
C022-A diagnosis outlet - OBDII
C312 Supplementary relay ECU 2 (CS-SCM 2)
D002-A Ignition switch
D006 Brake indicator switch
E004-V Body computer node (NBC)
E008-A Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL)
E304 Tyre pressure node (NTP)
E312 Suspension control node (NCS)
I303 LH front side marker
L011 Key lock solenoid
L019 Engine cooling electric fan relay - 1
L114 Electric engine cooling fan relay - 2
P035 Battery charge state sensor fuse
S020 Immobiliser antenna
S031 RF receiver antenna
W015 Power steering ECU
X003 Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / dashboard cable
X008 Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 2 of 2
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
wiring
X016-B Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / AC unit cable
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable and rear
X115-B
wiring
Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
X200
wiring (right-hand side)
Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
X201
wiring (left-hand side)
Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
X301
wiring
X358 Disconnector for C-CAN line diagnosis
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable and rear
m
Y115-A
wiring
Y302-A Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z023 Yaw node (NYL)
Z045 Steering angle sensor node (NAS)
.co
es
uid
-g
all
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
Y005 Junction between front bumper cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Z035 External front parking sensor - left-hand side
Z036 External front parking sensor - right-hand side
Z037 Internal front parking sensor - left-hand side
Z038 Internal front parking sensor- right-hand side
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
I003 Rear fog light - left-hand side
I009 Number plate light - left-hand side
I010 Number plate light - right-hand side
I035 Rear fog light - right-hand side
Y039 Junction between rear bumper cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z007 External rear parking sensor - left-hand side
Z008 External rear parking sensor - right-hand side
Z009 Internal rear parking sensor - left-hand side
Z010 Internal rear parking sensor - right-hand side
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
X400 CCP gearbox connector
X402 SAP gearbox connector
X403 GEARSET gearbox connector
X404 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y405 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y406 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
C001-B Battery ECU (CBA)
E302 Lift system ECU
G095 Hydraulic pump earth - right hand cylinder bank
L121 Lift system solenoid valve
L222 Lift system pump relay
M095 Lift system hydraulic pump
Y090 Junction between lift system cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
R009-A Passenger airbag
R009-B Passenger airbag
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
R010 Door airbag - driver's side
Y230 Junction between driver side curtain airbag cable / driver side door cable
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
R011 Door airbag - passenger's side
Y231 Junction between passenger side curtain airbag cable / passenger side door cable
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
E008-B Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL)
HCL3 Connection with AC vent control module
M853 Foot area air vent actuator - right-hand side
M854 Foot area air vent actuator - left-hand side
M855 Dashboard side air vent actuator - right-hand side
M856 Dashboard side air vent actuator - left-hand side
M857 Dashboard central air vent actuator - left-hand side
M858 Dashboard central air vent actuator - right-hand side
M859 Defrost air distribution flap actuator - right-hand side
M860 Defrost air distribution flap actuator - left-hand side
S851 Treated air temperature sensor - left-hand side
S852 Treated air temperature sensor - right-hand side
S871 Passenger compartment air temperature internal sensor (ICS)
XAC1 AC unit/passenger compartment ventilation fan cable junction
Y016-B Junction between AC unit cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Z005 Sun sensor
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
M001 Passenger compartment air electric fan
M851 Air recirculation actuator
M871-A Electric fan power module (PM2)
M871-B Electric fan power module (PM2)
YAC1 Passenger compartment ventilation fan/AC unit cable junction
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
m
.co
es
Code Description
M038 Glove compartment motor
M308 Glove compartment motor
uid
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
All manuals and user guides at all-guides.com
Code Description
L068-B Surround speaker (1) - left-hand side
L071 Surround speaker (1) - right side
L074 Surround speaker (2) - left-hand side
L075-B Surround speaker (2) - right side
X069 HIFI braid joint
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011